Home
        MACS User Manual.book
         Contents
1.                                                Sr Microsoft Windows Network     gi  MICUS   vw 2000_04_02 o rz   o El   PUPIN  wi 2000_04_29     El   RASTKO  v 2000_04_30 H E  SWRASTKONRASTKO_D  wi 2000_05_03 H E   RASTKONRASTKO_C  vd 2000_05 04 H E  WRASTKOWNC  v 2000_05_05 H E  WRASTKOMBI  v 2000_05_07 CES   WRASTKO MACS  vi 2000_05_08 o E  contig  Z  2000_05_09  fPM Demo 1 9  wi 2000_05 10  S 2000 06 11  WRASTKO MACS workings Network               Copy Stop File copy in progress  NNN Exit       List of files allows you to select the equipment log files to archive and to con   trol the file copy process     From date contains the start date and time of the period for which you want  to archive log files  When specifying the date and time  use the    Micus Alarm and Control System 95    Commands  same format as initially displayed in the field     To date contains the end date and time of the period for which you want  to archive log files  When specifying the date and time  use the  same format as initially displayed in the field     Select Files loads all equipment log files for the specified time period and for  the selected unit     File list contains all equipment log files for the specified time period  Each  log file has a checkbox  which is initially checked  If you don   t  want to archive a particular file  you can deselect it by clicking on  the checkbox     Destination directory    contains a tree hierarchy of your disk drives and folders  You can  expand it to s
2.                    REFRESH                        66 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 2 3 Equipment Specific Monitors    The equipment specific monitors show the selected unit operational status and allow  you to control the unit  The degree of control you can exercise over the equipment  depends on the equipment characteristics     For example  in this software release there is no equipment specific monitor for the  DMS switches  The Site Sentry units have equipment specific monitors which allow  you to see the current status of all currently used points within the unit  The monitors  also allow you to operate relays in the Site Sentry unit  if the unit is equipped with the  output modules     To open an equipment specific monitor  you need to select the type of equipment you  want to monitor  and a particular unit you are interested in  When you select the unit   the system dynamically creates an equipment specific monitor window and displays it  on the screen     To monitor a particular equipment unit  click the Monitor pull down menu and select the  Equipment Specific Monitors menu item     d   Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8 RAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog wiew Archive Configuration Help    Connect     E Disconnect     J Ki d   Ka   ES    Command Line      Status Monitor      Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node              Alternatively  click on the corresponding toolbar icon depicted in the picture below       Equip
3.               ALARMS Locks HOTKEYS   E viveo output ag _junoo   BB ciona BI loug   RESET   BB ouauty E F P Lock L ver TABLES  E presets _ FIRMWARE   BB communication DI timers    DEFAULTS                REFRESH         MACS monitor and control windows are non modal  This means that the user can  display more than one window on the workstation screen  and freely switch from one  window to another  As the system detects status changes  all windows on the screen  are updated accordingly     Each monitor and control window consists of two components  a background graphical  image and a list of status and control points  A background image can be created  using any graphic editor  such as MS Windows Paint or CorelDraw  When displaying  the window  the system determines the size of the image and adjusts the window size  accordingly  The following picture shows a typical on screen presentation of the  equipment front panel and alarm status     Micus Alarm and Control System 19    Overview    DIGITAL MULTIRATE MODEM       The list of points to display in the window is kept in the system configuration database   A single window may combine points from various pieces of equipment  The status  and alarm points only reflect equipment status  The control points have push buttons   which allow operators to set  reset  toggle or pulse the point     The points can be displayed on the screen using a variety of styles     20 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    LED style point is disp
4.      RASTKOMRASTKO_C  Gi      RASTKONVNC   S      RASTKONMBI   Ei     RASTKONMACS  H E contig   H A Demo 1 9     WRASTKOSMACS  working    Network    2                                   m   TT  EE  c    ea ea ea                       List of files    From date    To date    Select Files  File list    box allows you to select the event log files to archive and to con   trol the file copy process     field contains the start date and time of the period for which you  want to archive log files  When specifying the date and time  use  the same format as initially displayed in the field     field contains the end date and time of the period for which you  want to archive log files  When specifying the date and time  use  the same format as initially displayed in the field     push button loads all event log files for the specified time period     list box contains all event log files for the specified time period   Each log file has a checkbox  which is initially checked  If you  don   t want to archive a particular file  you can deselect it by click   ing on the checkbox     Destination directory    92    list box contains a tree hierarchy of your disk drives and folders   You can expand it to show your network resources as well  by  clicking on the Network button     Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Network push button adds your Microsoft Network resources to the initial    display of your local disk drives and folders    Copy push button starts the process of copyin
5.     Configuration    This dialog box allows you to define the event report text  color combination and  severity to use when reporting that the point has changed its state  You can also  define whether to send a pager message when a state transition is detected     The dialog box consists of the following elements     Name  Active    Active Text    Active Color    Active Severity  Page  Inactive    Inactive Text    Inactive Color    Inactive Severity  Page    OK    208    contains the input point name  You can use up to 15 character  long names  which can include spaces     group of controls allows you to define the text  color combination   severity and paging to use when the point becomes active     edit box allows you to enter the text to include in the event report  issued when the point becomes active  If you leave this field  blank  no event report will be displayed in the MACS user inter   face  but the system will still update all graphical status and con   trol windows     pull down list allows you to select the foreground and background  color combination to use in the event report issued when the  point becomes active     pull down list allows you to select the severity level to use in the  event report issued when the point becomes active     checkbox allows you to specify whether to send a pager mes   sage when the point becomes active     group of controls allows you to define the text  color combination   severity and paging to use when the point becomes inacti
6.    DN      Pf WordPad          MacsM  EES ICH Microsoft Developer Network  gt          Microsoft visual C   6 0 V  an Real  gt    m  winzip  gt   AA MSN Messenger 6 0    Paint      RealOne Player          HCH a CS CS CS CS    Lex  e  US    8 CS CS CS    Getting Started    ColorCfg  DemocCfg  IPGCFg  IPGGUI  LogCfg  MacsEditor       MacsManager  MacsMenu  MacsU  MapiCfg  MenuCfg  PagerCfg       Lem    CJ 8 SD 4 33pm    In order to properly function  your GUI must be connected to the server  Usually  the  GUI is set up to connect to the server automatically when you start it  In such a case   when the GUI opens its main window  you will see an event report similar to the follow     ing example     Micus Alarm and Control System    45    Getting Started    This event report indicates that your GUI is properly connected to the server  If you do  not get this event report on the screen  you will have to connect to the server manu   ally  using the Connect command  Details on the connect command are given later in  this manual     You can start any other MACS user interface program using the same two methods  In  addition  for frequently used programs such as MacsMenu  you can also create a  shortcut in your desktop window     5 2 MACS Shutdown    To shut down all MACS components  you have to shutdown all user interface  programs and all Windows NT services     Usually  there is no need to stop the MACS server components  except for when you  want to change MACS configuration  or w
7.    File Edit View Tools Help   arom 2 Sl lta  Alle      ze  DI Folders   Contents of  programs   fal Macs     config   1 Distribution Application 21 05 00 11 50 AM  H  Doc Application 03 07 98 5 12 PM       Gene Application 23 11 00 9 31 PM  Ca voting  Application 02 09 00 4 59 PM  iP MacsEditor Application 18 05 00 1 27 PM    MacsGiEncoder Application 15 06 00 2 31 PM  Application   12 12 00 4 35 PM  Application 19 12 00 5 05 PM   29 NU Application 15 10 00 12 32 PM  a CH NTL Projects Application 16 11 98 4 18 PM  e CH Omninet i Application 16 11 98 2 08 PM   9 PhotoShop Application 15 11 00 5 12 PM   9 Projects    Recycler    ed Projects E   D Msdned1391 IF   Les Contral Panal EI   50 object s  10  7MB  Disk free space  2 50GB           Depending on your actual system configuration  the number of MACS programs in the  programs folder and program names will wary  In this example  the MACS folder is  installed on disk C  and contains the following subfolders     e The config folder contains database and bitmap files     e The Distribution folder contains a copy of installation files found on the MACS  software distribution CD     Micus Alarm and Control System 37    Getting Started    e The Doc folder contains a set of MACS documents in PDF format   e The  og folder contains daily event log files     e The programs folder contains all MACS executable programs and dynamic link  libraries  DLLs      e The Working folder contains MACS temporary files     The  MACS Programs folde
8.    MACS sends e mail and fax messages using the industry standard Messaging API   MAPI  interface  Status changes and alarm messages may be e mailed or faxed to  one or more users  Based on the event being reported  the MAPI service selects  from  the database  a list of responsible personnel and sends MAPI messages to all  individuals on the list     MACS itself does not contain fax and e mail software  It provides only the interface to  the operating system native fax and e mail services  To send MAPI messages  MACS  relies on a third party software  such as Microsoft Messaging  which comes with the  Windows NT operating system  and Microsoft Fax for Windows NT     4 9 Trouble Tickets    As an option  your MACS server may be equipped with the MACS Trouble Ticket  System  TTS    In such a case  MACS automatically opens trouble tickets predefined  in its configuration database  A ticket is opened when the system detects equipment  failure and closed explicitly by the operator  Once the ticket is open  the operator can  select appropriate repair procedure from the predefined list and assign a responsible  technician  The technician can enter his comments related to the repair and  upon  completing the task  close the ticket     Operators can view and print individual tickets  a list of open tickets  or a list of closed  tickets  In addition  obsolete tickets can be deleted from the list of closed tickets        1  The TTS is an add on component  which must be purchased separat
9.    Micus Alarm and Control System 205    Configuration    At the top of the dialog box you will see the slot name and number  shown as read   only boxes  To change the slot name or address  use the Configure Slot command   The rest of the 16 Point Slot Configuration dialog box is divided into two groups  The  left hand group  designated as  nputs  allows you to add or to modify the input points  configuration  The right hand group  marked Outputs  allows you to configure output    relays     To add an input or output point  or to modify an existing point configuration  click on  the push button associated with the point  Dialog boxes used to configure points are  described later in this document     The dialog box consists of the following elements     Name  Address  Inputs    Outputs    Exit    206    read only box contains the slot name   read only box contains the slot number     group of controls shows 16 digital inputs  Input points that are  actually used are indicated by their respective names  To add a  new input point  select an unused point and click on the adjacent  push button  To modify an existing point configuration  click on  the push button next to the point name     group of controls shows 16 relays  Relays that are actually used  are indicated by their respective names  To add a new relay   select an unused output point and click on the adjacent push but   ton  To modify an existing output point configuration  click on the  push button next to the point nam
10.    Service Control EN    Attempting to Stop the MACS Event Logger service on  DOSITEJ       5 2 2 MACS GUI Shutdown    You exit your MACS user interface programs the same way as any other Microsoft  Windows application  For the MacsMenu program use one of the following methods     e Click on the    X    button in the top right corner of the window     e Select File   gt  Exit from the main window pull down menu     48 Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started    Some configuration utilities are dialog box based  For these programs  you can use  one of the following methods     e Click on the    X    button in the top right corner of the main dialog box window     e Click on the Exit push button in the main dialog box window     5 3 Elements of the Main MACS Window    In this section we present commonly used GUI features  while the details specific to  the individual commands are given later in this document  All MACS programs share  the same    look and feel    and follow the Microsoft user interface implementation guide   lines  The main window for the MacsMenu program is depicted in the following picture     CT Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1  Eile Monitor Equipment Locking Pager Event Log View Archive Configuration Help    S          Blend     ei gel       11 27 1999 15 22 56 DEMO 2    11 27 1999 15 23 00 DEMO 2 Is CLOSED    11 27 1999 15 23 08 DEMO 2             Ready A       The key elements of a GUI main window are     Title Bar on the left side co
11.    YELLOW ON DARK BLU v               Display Styles  I Read Only I Scientific          i Mv   H  Zz wW  IC   Options  Ir sl Max     SS   a                Add   Delete   Modify   Save    fies ew ime                The following table briefly introduces various display styles you can use to draw your  points  The list of styles available for the digital inputs  digital outputs and analog  inputs is given on the following pages     Micus Alarm and Control System 241    Creating Custom Screens    2       LJTEMERATURE    ll  o   SC       Baseball Switch    E    2    LED style point is displayed as a small circle or square  that changes color as the associated point changes its  state  The point name is not displayed  This style is typi   cally used to draw the equipment front panels     Points can be displayed using either full width  half width  or proportional width rectangles  A rectangle contains  the point name and changes its color as the point  changes status  Full and half size rectangles are used to  align points displayed in the window  Proportional width  rectangles are used to make their size proportional to the  point name length     Points can be displayed using either solid or transparent  rectangles  Solid rectangles change both foreground and  background color when the associated point changes  state  Transparent rectangles change only the outline  and the text color  while the background remains visible  through the rectangle     Output points can be displayed w
12.    tocol port  by other computers and programs on your network to  establish a TCP IP connection with your pager     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Protocol port edit box allows you to specify the TCP IP protocol port your pager  will listen to service requests from other computers and programs  on your TCP IP network     Text Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your pager will maintain its  own text event log  This box is normally unchecked  which means  that the pager will not create and maintain its own set of daily cre   ated event log text files  Usually  the pager is configured to report  its events to the event logger     Text log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  that will contain the pager event log text files  If you want your  pager to maintain its own event log  you must specify a folder that  differs from the event log maintained by the event logger     Binary Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your pager will maintain its  own binary event log  This box is normally unchecked  which  means that the pager will not create and maintain its own set of  daily created event log binary files     Binary log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  that will contain the pager specific event log binary files     For instructions on how to specify the path for the pager specific event log  please  refer to the chapter on Event Logger Configuration     7 
13.   ACTIVE LEFT  BOTTOM ACTIVE RIGHT  LEFT ACTIVE BOT   TOM  LEFT ACTIVE TOP  RIGHT ACTIVE BOTTOM  RIGHT  ACTIVE TOP  TOP ACTIVE LEFT  and TOP ACTIVE RIGHT     For the Baseball Switch  you can select the active orientation of  the baseball switch  between TOP ACTIVE RIGHT and TOP  ACTIVE LEFT     For the Door style  you can select the door position and orienta   tion of the open door  The available options are  DOWN OPEN  LEFT  DOWN OPEN RIGHT  LEFT OPEN DOWN  LEFT OPEN  UP  RIGHT OPEN DOWN  RIGHT OPEN UP  UP OPEN LEFT  and UP OPEN RIGHT     When you select a summary point  the Options list allows you to  select the action to take when the summary point becomes  active  The action is usually to display the next screen  which  shows in more details the individual points included in the sum   mary point  The next screen is either DEFAULT MONITOR  or  NEXT MONITOR  The DEFAULT MONITOR displays the stan   dard equipment specific screen for the selected equipment  The  NEXT MONITOR invokes the next custom screen that you design  yourself  To specify which custom screen to display  use the  Monitor field     Micus Alarm and Control System    Max    Min    Name    Add    Delete    Modify    Save    Creating Custom Screens    edit box allows you to specify the maximum analog value for the  analog points  This field is ignored when digital input or output is  selected     edit box allows you to specify the minimum analog value for the  analog points  This field is ignored when digital i
14.   Configuration       Pager Service Selection    ray             A Are you sure you want to delete this service              To delete the service  click on the Yes push button  To exit without deleting the  service  click on the No push button     7 4 7 4 View Pager Services    To create a report with a list of all your pager services  open the Pager Service  Selection dialog box and click on the View Services push button  The system will  create the report and present it using the WordPad text editor  From within the editor   you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for Keywords  cut and paste  report contents and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The following picture  illustrates a typical report layout     158          Pager Service Configuration   Notepad    aax          File Edit Format View Help    D f  List of units     BELL_MBL  NOVANET  LOOK TV    Pager service  BELL_MBL  Polling interval    Telephone number  4162857267  Pager users     Michael Bankovitch  637709    paga service  NOVANET  Polling interval  10  Telephone number  4162857267  Pager users     Stewart Sheriff  335015    Pager service  LOOK TV  Polling interval  60  Telephone number  4162857267  Pager users        AA       Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 4 8 Pager Users    Once you define your pager services  you need to define a list of pager users for each  pager service  For example  if you use one pager service in the Vancouver area and  another servic
15.   Details push button  The Pager Event Details dialog box will pop up on the screen   This dialog box layout is presented on the following pages     Pager Messages Assigned to this User    All Pager Events  Server    Unit    Slot    Point    Details    Delete    164    scrollable list box contains allpager messages assigned to the  selected user     scrollable list box contains allsystem wide defined pager events     column in the list contains the name of the Windows NT service  from which the message originates     column in the list contains the name of the equipment unit from  which the message originates     column in the list contains the name of the slot within the equip   ment from which the message originates  Many communication  equipment devices have slots used to install equipment plug in  modules  Equipment that does not have slots is considered sin   gle slot equipment  meaning that all components are located  within a single  monolithic unit     column in the list contains the name of the point from which the  message originates     push button allows you to display details on the selected pager  message  There are two Details push buttons in the dialog box   one for each list  If you want to see the text messages assigned  to a given pager event  highlight the event in either the top or bot   tom list  and click on the corresponding Details push button  The  Pager Event Details dialog box will pop up on the screen  This  dialog box layout is presented on the f
16.   File delete in progress     Delete   Stop Exit                     allows you to select event log files to delete     contains the start date and time of the period for which you want  to delete event log files  When specifying the date and time  use  the same format as initially displayed in the field     contains the end date and time of the period for which you want  to delete event log files  When specifying the date and time  use  the same format as initially displayed in the field     loads all event log files for the selected time period     contains all event log files for the specified time period  Each file  has a checkbox  which is initially checked  If you do not want to  delete a particular file  deselect it by clicking on the checkbox     Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Delete button starts the process of deleting the selected files  When you  click on the button  the program prompts you with the query        Delete Event Log       4re you sure you want  to delete selected files              If you are sure that you want to delete the selected event log files   click on Yes  Otherwise  click on No     Stop terminates the process of deleting event log files   Progress bar graphically indicates the progress deleting the selected event log  files     6 9 4 Delete Equipment Log    If configured to maintain the equipment log  your MACS will  over a period of time   create a number of daily equipment log files  You may decide to keep on line a month  o
17.   In this example  you will select a half size rectangle with  the solid background     Display Styles      Read Only   Scientific     MAJOR   bel   mMAJOR oO   Wee  p  Pall   H HAJOR   WMHAJOR   mMAJOR    et    Next  you need to add your point to your custom screen  Place the mouse pointer to  the location in the custom screen where you want to position the top left corner of your  point  Press the right button and drag the mouse to create a rectangle which repre   sents your point location  As you drag the mouse  the coordinates and size of your  point rectangle will show up in the Point Attributes  In this case  the rectangle size is  predetermined by the selected display style  and the system will accept only the X and  Y coordinates  while the width and length will be ignored     280 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Point Attributes   x  Gei elen vim   w  25  Options  E Max   0 00  Name  Ir Min    0 00    Add Modify   Save      You can adjust the location by manually changing the X and Y coordinates  To add  your point  click on the Add push button  To save your point in the database  click on  the Save push button     Your newly added point will look somewhat like this     8 11 3 Baseball Switch    In this example you will map a digital output to a baseball switch  which is a graphical  symbol frequently used in satellite communications     To add a digital output point to you custom screen  do the following   e From the Source pull down list
18.   The View Event Log command is used to view all event reports saved by the system  on a given date  To open a log file click on the Event Log pull down menu and select  View Event Log     d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog View Archive Configuration Help    View Event Log     aa   EB  amp  a i m J i j view Equipment Log    Alternatively  you can click on the appropriate toolbar icon depicted in the following pic   ture        el View event log    If your system is configured to maintain more than one event log  you will be prompted  to select the event log you want to examine        Select Event Log    IBS  LOGGER  SENTRY       Cancel                     Micus Alarm and Control System 81    Commands    The pull down list in the Select Event Log dialog box contains the names of all event  loggers in your system  Select the logger you are interested in and click the OK push  button  To exit the command without selecting the logger  click on the Cancel push  button     Once you select the event log  the Select Event Log File dialog box will pop up on the  screen        Look in      asc D da rr ES     Select Event Log File       IS 2004_01_05   E 2004_01_06        2004_01_12  Sl 2004_01_13           2004_01_18   3  2004_01_19       Sam nn  20040108  20040115 Sam nm 3  Sonn pm Sonn m Sonn ie Samu m 2   20040104  20040111 20040117 Sonn za    2004 _01_24     E  2004_01_25             E 20040107  20040114 Sonn 20  File
19.   You can select your event report recipient from  that list  or you can enter it manually in the Computer Name and  the Protocol Port fields     Computer name edit box allows you to enter the destination computer name   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Computer Name field is filled in automatically     Protocol Port edit box allows you to enter the destination TCP IP protocol port   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Protocol Port field is filled in automatically     Selected Recipients contains a list of all already configured recipients  These are the  destinations to which your event logger will send event reports     Add push button allows you to add a new event report recipient to the  Selected Recipients list  To add a new recipient  select it from the  MACS Recipients list  or enter the computer name and the proto   col port manually  Then click on the Add push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 129    Configuration    Delete push button allows you to delete an entry from the Selected  Recipients list  To delete a recipient  highlight it in the Selected  Recipients list and click the Delete push button     Exit push button closes the Event Reporting dialog box     When you add a destination to the Selected Recipients list  make sure that the corre   sponding service is actually running at the specified location on your network  If the  service is not running  your event logger will attempt to con
20.   connected to  Once you start the GUI  you can dynamically switch to any other MACS  database using the Select MACS Node command     To manually disconnect from the current database and connect to another database   click on the Monitor pull down menu and select the Select MACS Node menu item     58 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    d   Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8  Jog    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   View Archive Configuration Help       Connect      Disconnect     J    3  E KA    Command Line      Status Monitor     Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node        The Select MACS Node dialog box will pop up        Select MACS Node       MONTREAL  TORONTO                   A scrollable list box contains the names of all MACS nodes configured in the current  database  To select another MACS node  highlight its name in the list and click on the  Select push button     Select push button allows you to close the current MACS database  and  to open database on the selected MACS node   Quit push button closes the Select MACS Node dialog box without    connecting to another database     Micus Alarm and Control System 59    Commands    6 2 Monitors    The Monitors are windows that you use to monitor and to control your equipment   Monitor windows can be either equipment specific  or user defined     Equipment specific monitors are windows which are dynamically created by the sys   tem when you display the alarm points for the selected pi
21.   groups and domains     Micus Alarm and Control System 29    Overview    Individual user access to the regional servers can be controlled by assigning  personnel to different user groups  For example  membership in a given region group  will grant individual user access to the respective regional server  The same user can  be a member of more than one group  User groups can be defined in a way that  further refines access to various system resources within a given server     4 14 On line Diagnostics    All MACS programs have powerful built in real time on line diagnostics that can be  used in the field to verify system configuration and to monitor operation of the external  system interfaces     On line diagnostics can be accessed remotely by our customer support personnel  to  assist the operators in configuring and running the system         D  Projects MacsIlmage D ebug MacsImage exe Bisi x      gt  timeout     released    allocated    FA 03   i    FA  3   i    read 45      released    allocated  F4    M3  timeout   gt  event sent  M3  released    allocated    FA  F   i F2   gt  read H    released    allocated    FA  F   i Fi 48 41 4E 4E 45 4C 26 31 26    2  3C 3B FE    released    allocated  F4       timeout    released    allocated       30 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 15 System Connections    The following pages provide a functional and architectural overview of the various  system connections     4 15 1 Regional and Master Servers    MACS is a clien
22.   select  O POINTS     e From the Server pull down list  select the equipment module that contains the point  you are interested in     e From the Unit pull down list  select the unit that contains the point you are inter   ested in     e From the Point pull down list  select the point you are interested in  In this example   make sure to select a digital output     Source   10 POINTS v  Serer   MACS DEMO e 25    Unit   DEMO_2 v 34  Point  MAJOR X 8332    Type  Digital Output    Micus Alarm and Control System 281    Creating Custom Screens    At this point  the editor will indicate in the read only field Type whether you selected a  digital input  digital output  analog input or analog output point  At the same time  it will  present the display styles applicable to the selected point type     First  select the colors that you want to use for the active and for the inactive point    state  Note that the pulsed point state is ignored  In this example  you will select the  same color for all point states     Colors    Active Above    BLACK ON WHITE e    Inactive Within    BLACK ON WHITE e      Pulsed Below   f    S    Show State    ACTIVE X         Next  select the point style  In this example  you will select the baseball switch     Display Styles   f Read Only   Scientific  AJOR O  LIMAJOR O  H MAJOR            _i MAJOR    BR       LiIMAJOR  gt  2    _JMAJOR  LJMAJOR  _JMAJOR AN         Next  you need to add your point to your custom screen  Place the mouse pointer to  the lo
23.   select the equipment module  such as SENTRY     e From the Unit pull down list  select the name of the unit responsible for monitoring  alarms at the Toronto location  such as TORONTO SS2 in this example     Micus Alarm and Control System 287    Creating Custom Screens    e From the Points pull down list  select the Summary status point     Source   UNIT POINTS D  Server   MACS DEMO D 25  Unit   DEMO_1 D 30    Point   Summary v    Type  Summary    Once you select the point  you can rename it  In this case  you will change the name  of the point from Summary to Toronto     Source   UNIT POINTS ei   Serer   SENTRY e 1  Unit  TonoNntTo s52    i  Point  Tonto    7    Type  Summary    Next  select the colors that you want to use for the point active and inactive state     Colors    Active Above   DEFAULT CRITICAL D   Inactive Within   DEFAULT WARNING D  Pulsed Below   DEFAULT WARNING D   Show State    ACTIVE D    Next  select the display style to use for the summary point  In this example you will  use a see through rectangle  with the width proportional to the point name     288 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens          Display Styles     Read Only  Scientific  i bel  4 o  pif s    Next  you need to add your point to your custom screen  Place the mouse pointer to  the location in the custom screen where you want to position the top left corner of your  point  Press the right button and drag the mouse to create a rectangle which repre   sents your point 
24.  0 00       Finally  from the Name field in the Point Attributes  select the action itself from the  pull down list     m Point Attributes         Se  jo te fo H  jo W  fo  Options   EXECUTE PROGRAM D Max    0 00    Name    D Min    0 00   all E eee   Add PREVIEW SWITCH e  TELNET _Save         User s Manual    The action point is now ready to be included into your custom screen  To include it  specify the size and the position of the point and click on the Add push button     276 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 11 Using Display Styles    The following pages illustrate how to use the display styles  and how to include various  status and control points into your custom screens  Note that these examples do no  include all point styles and associated options  They are selected as typical tasks  required to create a custom screen     8 11 1 Digital Input    To add a digital input point to your custom screen  do the following     e From the Source pull down list  select IO POINTS     e From the Server pull down list  select the equipment module that contains the point  you are interested in     e From the Unit pull down list  select the unit that contains the point you are inter   ested in     e From the Point pull down list  select the point you are interested in  In this example   make sure to select a digital input     Source   10 POINTS X   Serer  SENTRY X 1  Unit   ELECTRALERT M 208  Point  IFIRST X 6095    Type  Digital Input    At this point  
25.  5 22PM         Paint       Launch RealOne Player  tees    winzip  ei Accessories  gt      Internet ei Games  gt   Internet Explorer    Lal PrintMe Internet Printing  gt  iP ColorCfg  We ies Express 3 sis 650_651_Meso_mes2_740   ri  FF  Democfg  EH Soundmax  gt    GP IPGCfg  eo Spider Solitaire 2 startup   i gear  UI IPGGUI Is Adobe Reader 6 0 iP LogCFg  B Internet Explorer iP MacsEditor  Lei Notepad mi MSN Explorer i  MacsManager  ka Outlook Express iP MacsMenu  i IPGCfg s  Remote Assistance iP MacsUtl  Ei    Windows Media Player i  Mapicfg        aT Data Sources  ODBC         M          If your system is configured to provide access to the configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI     you can also start the user interface configuration utility by  selecting configuration utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu  or by clicking the Configuration button on the toolbar        7  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained later in this document  in Access To Con   figuration Utilities     132 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 Joe    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager   Event Log View Archive Configuration Help              Select Configuration Utility    The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities              Color Definitions  Dem
26.  BAX  Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Wiew Archive Configuration Help     v Toolbar   22  A  amm Ad VE ebe    6 7 4 About Box       In MS Windows applications  the About box contains information on the product   vendor and a copyright notice  To examine your MACS GUI About box  click on Help      gt  About MACS     Micus Alarm and Control System 87    Commands      d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   We Archive Configuration Help          About MACS     ax     Gi BI en   eA    gea User s Manual    Alternatively  you can click on the Help icon     H MACS GUI about box    The About dialog box layout will be similar to the one depicted in the following picture     About Micus Alarm And Control System    Micus Alarm And Control System Version 3 3 1    Micus Real Time Software  5863 Lesile St  Suite 127  Willowdale  ON   M2H 1 8   Canada    Phone   416  493 3623  Fax   416  502 9083  E mail  mikeb micus sympatico ca    Copyright    Micus Real Time Software Inc   1997  1998  1999  2000  2001  2002  2003   2004                88 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 8 User   s Manual    You have the option of installing an on line version of the MACS User   s Manual   Should you choose to do this  you can read the manual from the screen  using the  Acrobat Reader  For instructions on how to install your on line manual  please refer to  Local User Interface Options in the Configuration chapter o
27.  Contents    8 2 3 Control Screens       06  cece eee eee eee eee AA a nena 226   8 3 Steps To Create A Custom Screen  002s 227  8 4 Selecting Graphic Editor             00 eee eee eee eee eee 228  8 5 Starting Display Editor           0 00 c eee eee 228  8 6 Creating Custom Screen         0  cece eee eee eee eee 232  8 6 1 New Background Image      232  8 6 2 Managing Custom ScreenS  20 0 c eee eee eee eee 233  8 6 2 1 Add Custom Screen        00  cece eee eee eee 235   8 6 2 2 Modify Custom Screen        0    c eee eee eee 235   8 6 2 3 Delete Custom Screen      2 0 0  cee eee eee 235   8 6 3 View Custom Screens      0 0    cece eee 236   8 7 Adding Status and Control Ponts    237  8 7 1  Selecting Points erie rea cats EE NEIEN eae NEE AUER EE alata hale 238  8 7 2 Selecting Colors       0    cece eee eee 239  8 7 3 Selecting Display Styles      0    0    eee nee 240  8 7 4 Analog Input Point Styles     2 0 0 0    e cee eee eee 246  8 7 5 Digital Input Display Styles       0 0    ccc cee eee 248  8 7 6 Digital Output Display Styles      249  8 7 7 Summary Display Styles          00  eee 250  8 7 8 Specifying Point Attributes       0 0    cece eee 251   8 8 Using BitmapS   ENNEN EE NEE EEN ae eee ne EEN eee 254  8 8 1 Creating Bitmaps       0    0c eee eee 254  8 8 2 Managing Bitmaps 0 0    e eee eee 255  8 8 2 1 Add Bitmap  ENN EINEN ieee eee ee ete bake beet 256   8 8 2 2 Configure Bitmap         0 00  cece eee eee 257   8 8 2 3 Delete Bitmap      2    cee eee 257   8 8 2 
28.  LAN  or a wide area  network  WAN   Thus  the operators can access the equipment  locally or remotely from geographically distant locations  MACS  supports a variety of communication media  ranging from simple  telephone lines to advanced LAN and satellite connections     6 Micus Alarm and Control System    Introduction    Industry Standards Many networking and telecommunications devices support the    industry standard Simple Network Management Protocol  SNMP    MACS SNMP manager features allow for SNMP devices monitor   ing and control without using any equipment specific software   MACS SNMP agent allows MACS to act a s a proxy agent for  other SNMP managers     Cost effectiveness Compared to most of the competitive products  MACS provides a    highly cost effective solution  Highly modular design concepts  allow for rapid and easy customization  and simplify support for  the newly added equipment     3 3 What can you do with MACS     The key MACS features are     Micus Alarm and Control System    Support is available for variety of equipment  connected to one or more computers   using either serial lines or network connections     Support for the equipment that uses SNMP protocol    Built in opto isolated digital inputs for monitoring contact closures   Built in relays for controlling external devices    Simple  friendly and intuitive Graphical User Interface  GUI      Monitor and control screens implemented as graphical images  which can be  added to the system by the e
29.  Pager Event Log   Mea Archive Configuration Help  es Connect       Disconnect     J  e A Ka   ES    Command Line      Status Monitor     Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node           Alternatively  click on the corresponding toolbar icon depicted in the following picture     D Command Line Window    The system displays a dialog box depicted in the following picture  This dialog box con   sists of the following elements     Working Area will show all commands and responses exchanged between you  and the equipment  When the number of lines exceeds window  size  a vertical scroll bar will show up  and you can use it to scroll  through several pages of communication data     Edit Box below the working area allows you to enter an equipment specific  command that you want to send to the selected equipment     Send push button sends commands to the selected unit  Type the com   mand into the command line entry field in the bottom left corner of  the Command Line window  Then  click on the Send push button   Instead of the push button  you can also press the Enter key on    your keyboard    Select push button allows you to select the equipment you are interested  in    Exit push button exits the dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 61    Commands       Command Line Mode       Gow          Send   Select   Exit                  Once the Command Line window is displayed  you need to select the equipment you    want to communicate with  To select the equipment  click on th
30.  Product Description  Revision 2 0  October 7   2000  Michael Bankovitch     3 Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS  SNMP User   s Manual  Revision 1 0   December 23  2002  Michael Bankovitch     4 Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS  Script Language Reference  Revision 1 0   January 4  2002  Michael Bankovitch    Micus Alarm and Control System 3    Reference Documents    4 Micus Alarm and Control System    Introduction    3 Introduction    This section introduces the Micus Alarm And Control System  MACS  and its compo   nents and briefly describes their major functions  The following sections address these  topics in much greater detail     The remaining part of this document is structured as follows     e Section 4  Overview presents the MACS system and describes its architecture  key  components and features     e Section 5  Getting Started introduces some basic concepts on how to use the  MACS system     e Section 6  Commands describes each available command in detail   e Section 7  Configuration explains the MACS configuration process     e Section 8  Creating Custom Screens shows how to use the optional MACS Display  Editor to create your own custom monitor and control windows     3 1 What is MACS     Micus Alarm And Control System  MACS  is a computer based system which  configures  controls and monitors various pieces of equipment  and collects and  processes alarms generated by the equipment  The system is used to monitor and  control communications equipment  the b
31.  System 253    Creating Custom Screens    8 8 Using Bitmaps    The Display Editor allows you to redraw the entire section of the screen based on the  current state of any given point  Point states can be presented using two or three  bitmap drawings  one for each state  When the point changes its state  the specified  section of the screen is redrawn using the bitmap that is associated with the new point  state     In the following example  the below limit  within limits and above limit states of an  analog point are mapped into the images of a street lights shown below        The bitmaps you design may be of arbitrary size and complexity  However  the  bitmaps that you assign to the same point will overlap each other within the same  area on the screen  Thus  the bitmaps assigned to the same point must be of equal  size     To add bitmaps to your custom screens  you have to    e Create your bitmaps using your favorite graphic editor    e Add the bitmaps to the list of bitmaps used by the system   e Link the bitmaps with a status or a control point     e Position the bitmaps in your custom screen     8 8 1 Creating Bitmaps    Graphical images that you use for your custom screens can be created using any  graphical tools  The only limitation is that they must be saved as bitmap files   bmp   which is the format used internally by Windows  The simplest way to create bitmaps is  to use Microsoft Paint  which comes with the Windows operating system  You can  also use digital scan
32.  Typically  you will either describe the  color itself  as in BLUE ON GREEN  or you will describe the condition you intend to  use this color for  as in CRITICAL ALARM     There are some color descriptions which must exist within the system and you cannot  modify them  These descriptions are     e DEFAULT CRITICAL   e DEFAULT MAJOR   e DEFAULT MINOR   e DEFAULT WARNING   When you select one of these color definitions and open the Modify Color dialog box     the color description field will be grayed out     Micus Alarm and Control System 111    Configuration    7 1 4 Add Color    To add a new color definition  click on the Add push button in the main dialog box   The Add Color dialog box  depicted in the figure below  will pop up  The dialog box  has the following layout     Description    Blinking    Foreground    Background    112          Add Color  Description     l Blinking    Foreground Background         NEW COLOR         Cancel                   is an edit box provides a space on which you type in your new  color description  As you edit description  the preview box will  show your newly entered description text     check box determines whether the color will blink when displayed  on the screen  Note that blinking applies only to the graphical  images  Text screens  such as the GUI main window  do not sup   port blinking     is a push button that opens a standard Windows dialog box to  select colors  described on the previous pages  When you select  the foreground col
33.  a map with one hundred remote sites  it will take one hundred telephone calls  to refresh the entire status  This is why the summary screens initially use only the  status already known to the system  and do not provide any means for a dynamic  refresh     A typical summary screen is depicted in the following picture     iJ Region Monitor __    North Bay    Quebec      Montreal    Ontario    me     hawa       Micus Alarm and Control System 223    Creating Custom Screens    8 2 2 Status Screens    Status Screens are custom screens that may contain one or more summary points   but must contain at least one input point or read only output point  Status screens are  typically used to display the status of the selected equipment  without providing any  means to operate the equipment  In these screens  summary points can be used to  open the next screen  while the input points and read only output points are used to  present the equipment status     You can use a Summary point to show the overall equipment status  You can also  display a summary point with a push button and link that button to the next screen  In  such a case  clicking on a Summary point push button displays the next screen  which  usually presents the equipment in more detail     In a single custom screen  you can include input points and read only output points  from any piece of equipment attached to the MACS  In other words  you are not  restricted to one equipment unit per screen  You can combine several piec
34.  a new enumerated set to your system configuration  open the Select  Enumerated Set dialog box and click on the Add Set push button  The Add  Enumerated Set dialog box will pop up on the screen        Add Enumerated Set       SetID  0    Name   Cancel                      This dialog box consists of the following     Set ID read only field shows the enumerated set database identifier     Name edit box allows you to enter the enumerated set name     Micus Alarm and Control System 263    Creating Custom Screens    OK push button creates a new enumerated set and closes the dialog  box   Cancel push button closes the dialog box without creating a new enu     merated set     8 9 1 2 Configure Enumerated Set    To rename an existing enumerated set  open the Select Enumerated Set dialog box  and click on the Configure Set push button  The Configure Enumerated Set dialog box  will pop up on the screen  This dialog box layout and operation is the same as the Add  Enumerated Set dialog box  described above     8 9 1 3 Delete Enumerated Set    To delete an existing enumerated set from your system configuration  open the Select  Enumerated Set dialog box  highlight the set that you want to delete and click on the  Delete Set push button  The following message box will pop up on the screen        Select Enumerated Set       A   re you sure you want to delete this set              To delete the selected enumerated set  click on the Yes push button  To close the  message box without deletin
35.  alist of all possible event reportrecipients known to your MAPI  interface  You can select your event report recipient from that list   or you can enter it manually in the Computer Name and the Proto   col Port fields  Typically  you will configure your MAPI interface to  send its event reports to your event logger     Computer name edit box allows you to enter the destination computer name   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Computer Name field is filled in automatically     Micus Alarm and Control System 177    Configuration    Protocol Port edit box allows you to enter the destination TCP IP protocol port   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list   the Protocol Port field is filled in automatically     Selected Recipients list contains all already configured recipients  These are the des   tinations to which your MAPI interface will send event reports   Typically  the list will contain only your event logger     Add push button allows you to add a new event report recipient to the  Selected Recipients list  To add a new recipient  select it from the  MACS Recipients list  or enter the computer name and the proto   col port manually  Then click on the Add push button     Delete push button allows you to delete an entry from the Selected  Recipients list  To delete a recipient  highlight it in the Selected  Recipients list and click the Delete push button     Exit push button closes the Event Reporting dialog box     Whe
36.  all of your custom monitor and control  screens  click on the View push button  The system will create a text file that contains  a list of all your custom screens  and present it using the WordPad text editor  From  within the editor  you can save the report into a file  print it  search for the specific  names  cut and paste  and perform other functions typical of WordPad     The following picture illustrates a typical report layout                  Custom Screens Configuration   Notepad BAX  File Edit Format View Help  fl  Region Monitor A    Bitmap    DOSITEI Dositej O MACS Config Region  bmp  Database ID  1  2  Montreal Site  Bitmap    DOSITEI Dositej O MACS ConTfig Bbell_mon  bmp  Database ID  2  3  Toronto site  Bitmap    DOSITEIJ Dositej O MACS Config Bell_tor  bmp z  Database al 3  4  Building Layout  Bitmap    DOSITEI Dositej O MACS Contig Building  bmp  Database ID  4  5  Remote Station Monitor  Bitmap    DOSITEIJ Dositej D MACS  Conti g Py1oncus tom  bmp  Database ID  5  6  Analog Test Monitor  Bitmap    DOSITEI Dositej O MACS ConTig Analog  bmp  Database ID  6  7  Image Video Monitor  Bitmap    DOSITEIJ Dositej D MACS  Conti g Image_vVideo_Monitor  bmp  Database ID  7  8  Look Network Ontario  Bitmap  O  MAcS Config Look_Network_Ont  bmp  Database ID  8  3  IV Summary Test  Bitmap  D  ERT Summary  bmp  Database ID   10  GI Encoder  Bitmap    DOSITEIJ Dositej O MACS ConTfig GI_Test  bmp  Database ID  10 y       Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Sc
37.  and Control System    Getting Started    Opens the Command Line dialog box      gt     Opens a command line mode window    e    Opens a list of the user defined monitor windows    EI    Opens the list of the equipment specific windows    D    Opens a dialog box to send pager message manually    E    Opens the selected log file for viewing    o    Opens the selected equipment specific file for viewing     e    Opens the selected configuration utility    EI    Displays the application About    box    EI    Displays MACS User   s Manual  this book          Micus Alarm and Control System 51    Getting Started    5 3 2 Event Report Format    Each event report displayed in the main window working area consists of     e Severity icon   e Date   e Time   e Alarm unit name  e Alarm point name    e Event report text    The severity levels and associated icons are defined as follows       Critical alarm         Major alarm      Minor alarm        Information only    Note that your system may not use all of these icons  Their usage will depend on the  severity levels you assign to your alarm messages  The event report text is displayed  using the foreground and background color assigned to the current state of the associ   ated point     5 4 Commands    From your GUI program  you can execute a number of commands to monitor and to  control your equipment  You can execute any command from the pull down menus  In  addition  you can execute the most frequently used commands by clicking on t
38.  as the  nested screen  Note that there is no limitation in the number of nested screens  You    can cascade as many of them as you want     The following example shows your regional map as the main screen  and the building  layout opened by clicking on the Toronto summary point     290 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    E Region Monitor    bi Building Layout       SET   RESET   PULSE   TOGGLE   REFRESH            8 12 Invoking Custom Screens    Once you save your custom screen configuration in the database  you can invoke that  screen from the MACS main GUI  You can invoke your custom screen from the  Monitor pull down menu  as show in the picture below            File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Mie Archive Configuration Help                       Connect      Disconnect      Command Line      Equipment Specific        You can also open your custom screen by clicking on the Monitor toolbar icon     Micus Alarm and Control System 291    Creating Custom Screens     i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 Jioleg    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Yiew Archive Configuration Help          In either case  the Monitors dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has  the following layout        Monitors           Analog Test Monitor    Building Layout T  File Copy Control   FTP    GI Encoder 7  Image Video Monitor   IPG Test   IM Summary Test   Large Test Image   Leitch AYS 481   Look Network Ontario   Montrea
39.  configured to send their event reports to that logger  However  the  system does allow for more than one logger  depending on the specific customer  requirements     In addition to the centralized event log  which contains the event reports from the  entire system  each equipment module can be configured to maintain its own event  log  Such a log will contain only the event reports from the equipment attached to that  equipment module     The system can maintain an ASCII event log  a binary event log  or both  ASCII logs  contain less information  but may be viewed and analyzed using any text editor   Binary logs contain more information and are better suited for processes such as  analysis  event correlation  and root cause rationalization                     2003_12_07   WordPad Jog  Eile Edit Yiew Insert Format Help   Del 464 a   Rs   12 07 2003 12 02 27 I LOGGER LOG FILE OPEN A   12 07 2003 12 02 30 I MACS SNMP Agent MacsSnmpagent Rev  3 0 0 SERVER MACS SNMP Agent   12 07 2003 12 02 33 I LOGGER MacsLogger Rev  3 0 1 SERVER LOGGER STARTUP   12 07 2003 12 20 09 I SENTRY MacsSentry Rev  3 2 0 SERVER SENTRY STARTUP   12 07 2003 12 20 23 I LOGGER LOGIN Michael FROM dositej   12 07 2003 12 20 39 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej OPEN   12 07 2003 12 20 40 M ELECTRALERT Second ACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 20 50 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej CLOSED   12 07 2003 12 20 52 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej OPEN   12 07 2003 12 20 52 W ELEC
40.  copy this file or not  Initially  all  checkboxes are checked  You can uncheck those files that you do not want to copy     Once you select your log files  you need to select a destination directory  The Desti   nation directory tree control initially shows all disk drives on your computer  When you  click on a particular drive  the program will open it and show the folders you have  By  clicking on folders  you can select subfolders until you reach your destination folder     Searching the entire network can be a time consuming process  For this reason  the  program does not initially show your network resources  If you want to copy your log  files to another computer  click on the Network button  The control will display other  Windows NT workstations on your Microsoft Network  Click on the computer of your  choice and select a disk drive and a folder  To start copying files  click on the Copy  button  You can stop the process by clicking on the Stop button     Micus Alarm and Control System 93    Commands    To enter the Copy Equipment Log command  click on Archive   gt  Copy Equipment  Log     D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   View Archive Configuration Help         Copy Event Log      aa   SE  amp  H EI eist J  gt  A E md Copy Equipment Log     Delete Event Log     Delete Equipment Log       The system will prompt you to select the unit for which you want to archive the  equipment log        Equipment 
41.  editor  Using the editor  you can save the report in a file  print it  cut and paste the text   and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The report layout is depicted in the  following picture             Bell Mobility Pager Configuration   Notepad BAX  File Edit Format View Help   Berver name  PAGER i     server ID  3  3  Computer name  DOSITEJ   Protocol port  4464    serial ports     Serial port name  COML    Data rate  1200   Ear tey EVEN   stop bits  T   Character size  7    Dial  YES    Modem initialization   AT amp FA amp NZ amp ADSH1LER2 amp D28C100V14 S0 157 90    Event reporting     DOSITEJ  4448  List of units     BELL_MBL          148 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 4 5 Serial Port Configuration    To send an alphanumeric page  your MACS needs to dial your paging service  provider   s telephone number  establish a modem connection  and submit the page  message using the TAP protocol  Pager dial out modem connections require a serial  port allocated to the pager service  MACS allocates serial ports exclusively  which  means that serial ports cannot be shared between programs on your MACS server   H    If you want to use more than a single pager service  you may want to use a separate  serial port  modem and telephone line for each service  MACS modules do not impose  any limitation on the number of serial ports you use  up to the maximum imposed by  your operating system  1     To allocate and configure serial ports to be used for your 
42.  in the pager message and sent to all users  configured to receive this message     Inactive within limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  point becomes inactive  or when an analog point value returns to  a value within limits  If the associated checkbox is checked  the  same text will be included in the pager message and sent to all  users configured to receive this message     Pulsed below limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  output is pulsed  or when an analog point value falls below the  lower threshold  This state is not used for the digital inputs  If the  associated checkbox is checked  the same text will be included in  the pager message and sent to all users configured to receive  this message        13 If there is no text message assigned to a given point state  the system will not display a text message when the  point enters that state  However  the system will still update all graphical images representing that point     166    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 4 8 3 Delete User    To delete an existing user from your pager configuration  highlight the user name in  the Pager Users dialog box  and click on the Delete push button  The following dialog  box will pop up        Pager Users       A Are you sure you want to delete this user              To delete the user  click on the Yes push button  To exit without deleting the user  click  on the No pu
43.  in the text field in an email and or fax  If  checked  the text will be sent  if unchecked  the text will not be  sent  If the text field is empty for a given state  the system will not    report point transition to that state     Active above limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  point becomes active  or when an analog point value exceeds the  upper threshold  If the associated checkbox is checked  the same  text will be included in the e mail and fax messages and sent to all  users configured to receive this message     Inactive within limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  point becomes inactive  or when an analog point value returns to  a value within limits  If the associated checkbox is checked  the  same text will be included in the e mail and fax messages and  sent to all users configured to receive this message     Pulsed below limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  output is pulsed  or when an analog point value falls below the       1  If there is no text message assigned to a given point state  the system will not display a text message when the  point enters that state  However  the system will still update all graphical images representing that point     Micus Alarm and Control System 185    Configuration    lower threshold  This state is not used for the digital inputs  If the  associated checkbox is checked  the same te
44.  left corner of the custom screen window     When adding your point  you can enter the coordinates manually  into the X and Y fields  You can also position the mouse on the  screen where you want to add your point and click the right    Micus Alarm and Control System 251    Creating Custom Screens    Height    Width    Options    252    mouse button  The editor will read the screen coordinates and fill  the X and Y fields automatically     edit box allows you to specify the height of the point  if applicable  for the selected style  Instead of entering the height manually   you can also hold down the right mouse button and drag the  mouse  The editor will draw a rectangle on the screen and fill in  the coordinates  height and width field automatically     edit box allows you to specify the width of the point  if applicable  for the selected style  Instead of entering the width manually  you  can also press the right mouse button and drag the mouse  The  editor will draw a rectangle on the screen and fill in the coordi   nates  height and width field automatically     Some display styles offer you a list of options to select from     For the Line display style  you can select the thickness of the pen  used to draw the line  The options are  THIN LINE  MEDIUM  LINE and THICK LINE     For the Switch style  you can select the orientation of the switch   These options specify the moving end of the switch orientation  and active position of the switch  Available options are  BOTTOM
45.  main dialog box list  and click  on the Delete push button  The program will display the following prompt        MACS Color Definitions       This color may be used in your monitor and control windows   Are you sure you want to delete it              Before deleting any color  ensure that the color is not assigned to any status and  control messages and or graphical screens     There are some color definitions which must exist within the system and you cannot  delete them  These definitions are     DEFAULT CRITICAL  DEFAULT MAJOR  DEFAULT MINOR  DEFAULT WARNING    If you attempt to delete any of these definitions  the program will display the following                         prompt   MACS Color Definitions  Default system colors can not  be deleted or renamed   114 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 1 7 View Colors    To view a list of all color definitions  click on the View push button in the main dialog  box  The program will create a text report with details on all color definitions  and  present the report using the WordPad text editor     From within the editor  you can search for the specific color description  cut and paste  parts or the entire report  print it or save it into a text file  and perform other functions  typical of WordPad  A typical report layout is presented in the following picture         MACS Color Definitions   Notepad  File Edit Format View Help    1  DEFAULT CRITICAL  color LOS  Foreground   Background   Blinking      DEFAULT 
46.  menu     212 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    If you install MACS configuration utilities on a server  and you want to include them  into the Start menu on other workstations  you will have to manually create a MACS  program group on each workstation     For details on creating Windows Start menu program groups  please refer to the  Windows documentation     7 7 2 Adding Configuration Utilities to MACS GUI    When you add a MACS configuration utility to the MACS main GUI  the utility will  appear in the Configuration Utilities dialog box  depicted in the following picture  To run  the utility highlight its name on the list and click on the Open push button  or simply  double click on the utility name        Configuration Utilities              Color Definitions  Demo Server Configuration   Display Editor   DSR 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration   File Copy Configuration   Gl Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration   IPG Quality Control Configuration   Liebert RCMS8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration   MPEG Monitor Confiauration K      Cancel                        To add MACS configuration utilities to the list of utilities accessible through the Config   uration Utilities dialog box  use the MACS Configuration Utilities program MacsUtl   Start MacsUt  program by clicking on Start   gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt  MacsUtl     Micus Alarm and Control System 213    Configuration           
47.  name   20040124  Files of type  P  Cancel                     The Select Event Log File dialog box is a standard MS Windows dialog box that  allows you to open a file  In the scrollable working area  the box will show you all daily  event log files  Select the file you want to view and click on the Open push button     Daily event log file names have the following format     YYYY_MM_DD   where    YYYY represents the year  MM represents the month  DD represents the day    When you select a file  the system will open the file using the WordPad text editor   From within the editor  you can print the file  save it into another file  search for a  particular character string  cut and paste event reports  and performs other functions  typical of WordPad     82 Micus Alarm and Control System    An example of a log file format is depicted in the following picture     Commands       2003_12_07   WordPad    Walks       Oe 44 a    12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003  12 07 2003          File Edit view Insert Format Help    LOGGER   MACS SNMP Agent  LOGGER  SENTRY  LOGGER  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  LOGGER  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELECTRALERT  ELE
48.  on the equipment  configuration can be done using the command  line mode interface or equipment specific configuration utilities     3 6 Event Log Management    Each MACS event report is stored into a log file  This feature allows static analysis of  the recorded alarm conditions  The system automatically creates and maintains log  files on a daily basis  Since all event reports are stored into the files  the simplest way  of analyzing events is to view the log files  While viewing any given file  you can search  for specific keywords or text strings  selectively print relevant portions of the file  or the  entire file     Micus Alarm and Control System 9    Introduction    3 7 Equipment Files Management    In addition to its own event reports  the system may be configured to save the entire  output received from the equipment in a separate set of log files  This feature is appli   cable only to some equipment  In such cases  each set of equipment files contains  only messages from the equipment received through one of the serial ports     3 8 Trouble Tickets    As an option  your MACS may come equipped with additional trouble ticketing system  components  When an alarm condition is detected  the trouble ticketing system auto   matically opens a trouble ticket  Trouble tickets are predefined in its configuration  database and associated with the detected alarm conditions  A ticket is opened when  the system detects equipment failure and closed explicitly by the operator  Onc
49.  output point  Control screens are  typically used to display the status of the selected equipment and to provide a means  to operate the equipment  In these screens  summary and input points are used to  present the equipment status  while output points are used to control the equipment     You can use a Summary point to show the overall equipment status  You can also  display a summary point with a push button and link that button to the next screen  In  such a case  clicking on a Summary point push button displays the next screen  which  usually presents the equipment in more detail     In a single custom screen  you can include input and output points from any piece of  equipment attached to the MACS  In other words  you are not restricted to one  equipment unit per screen  You can combine several pieces of equipment into a  logical chain  and show them all within a single screen     When a control screen is displayed  the points are initialized to the last status known  to the system  After that  points presentation on the screen will change as the  changes in status are detected in the associated equipment     When monitoring a remote site over a dial up line  refreshing the equipment status  can be a time consuming process  For this reason the control screens initially use only  the status already known to the system     The control screens provide means for a dynamic refresh and means to operate  output points  When the system determines that a given screen contains a
50.  points have push but   tons that allow you to set  reset  toggle or pulse the point  The points can be displayed  on the screen using variety of styles  such as LEDs  switches  lines  gauges  histo   grams and rectangles     The monitor and control windows are non modal  This means that you can display  more than one window on the workstation screen  and freely switch from one window  to another  As the system detects status changes  all windows on the screen are  updated accordingly     The system allows you to nest any number of windows you create into a logical chain   For example  the top level window may contain a geographical map with the regional  centers  By clicking on the regional center  you open the next window with the regional  map  which contains sites  Clicking on a given site opens a building layout window with  the equipment racks  secured doors  environment and power alarms  Finally  by click   ing on a particular rack  you display the equipment block diagram or a front panel     Micus Alarm and Control System 221    Creating Custom Screens    8 1 Custom Screen Components    Each monitor and control window consists of two components     e A background graphical image  e A list of status and control points    A background image can be created using any graphic editor  such as MS Windows  Paint or CorelDraw  When displaying the window  the system determines the size of  the image and adjusts the window size accordingly     The list of points to display in th
51.  points which  apply to the entire unit  Typical examples are the communication  alarm  which is triggered when communication with the entire unit  is lost  or the unit summary point  which indicates any change in    238 Micus Alarm and Control System    Server    Unit    Point    Type    Creating Custom Screens  the unit status     SERVER POINTS allow you to select status and control points  which apply to the entire server  A typical example is the server  summary point  which indicates any change in the server status     STATIC POINTS selection allows you to define any static points  you wish to use within your custom screen     pull down list contains the names of all MACS equipment modules  found in your configuration database  The associated read only  field shows the selected service database ID     pull down list contains the names of all equipment units that are  monitored and controlled by the selected equipment module  The  associated read only field shows the selected unit database ID     pull down list contains the names of all points within the selected  unit  The associated read only field shows the selected point  database ID     read only field shows you the type of point you selected  For  example  the selected point could be a digital input  digital output   or analog input     8 7 2 Selecting Colors    Upon selecting the point you want to display  you need to select which colors to use  for each point state  Note that this color selection is independent fr
52.  push button  To exit without deleting  the utility  click on the No push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 217    Configuration    7 7 6 View Configuration Utilities    To create a report that contains a list of all MACS configuration utility names and  program paths  click on the View push button  The system will create a report and  present it on the screen using the WordPad text editor  From within the editor  you can  save the report into a text file  print it  search for keywords  cut and paste  and perform  other functions typical of WordPad  A typical report layout is depicted in the following  figure     Utilities Configuration   Notepad  File Edit Format View Help      Event Log Configuration   SDOSITEI Dositej D Macs Programs Logcfg  exe    Color Definitions   SDOSITEI Dositej D Macs Programs colorctg  exe    Pager Configuration   A OOSITEIDositej O Macs Programs Pagercfg  exe    Graphic Editor  ms paint  exe    Monitor Configuration   ADOSITEI 0ositej OX Macs Programs MacsmMon   exe    Site Sentry Configuration   ADOSITEI Dositej D Macs Programs sentrycTg  exe    Demo Server Configuration  MA DOSITEJ Dositej D Macs  Programs Demot fg  exe    Display Editor   ADOSITEI Dositej O Macs Programs MacsEditor  exe    User Interface Configuration  NA DOSITEJNDositej O Macs Programs Menuctg  exe    Nucleus II Configuration   ADOSITEI Dositej DNMACSNProgramsNucleuscfg  exe    MAPI Configuration  D  Macs Programs Mapictg  exe    Trouble Ticketing Configuration  MA DOS
53.  relays  They can be set  reset or  pulsed  In addition  you can toggle the output point state  You can also refresh the  output point operational status     To operate an output point  you need to select the point by pressing the small push  button displayed with the point name  To deselect the point  press the push button  again  or simply select another point  The currently selected point is marked with a red  square displayed in the push button     Once you select the point  you can operate the point using the push buttons from the  toolbar displayed at the bottom of the window     Set push button sets the point to its active state   Reset push button resets the point to its inactive state   Pulse push button pulses the point from its current state to the opposite    state and back to the initial state  The duration of the pulse is  approximately 500 milliseconds     Toggle push button changes the state of the point from the current state  to the opposite state     Refresh push button refreshes the operational status of all points dis   played within the monitor window     6 2 4 1 Slot With 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs    If you select a MACS IO slot with 8 inputs and 8 outputs  the system will display the  following monitor window     Micus Alarm and Control System 73    Commands          EF FIRST CARD mf       Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS  Communication    Be K    Inputs  000000     8    5  Outputs  O90  E C  O Die C    Inputs    Outputs     1 I 1  0 ERR Ant  Defroste
54.  service that you want to start and  click the right mouse button  Select the Start option from a pull down list and click the  left mouse button on it  as shown in the next picture     File Action View Help       m  eE B R rmi sr    Sa Services  Local  By Services  Local           MACS Event Logger Name     Description   Status  o      Sa IPG Quality Control       Start the service By IPSEC Services Manages I    Started  By IPv6 Internet Conn    Provides in     Bs Logical Disk Manager Detects an    Started  Bs Logical Disk Manage    Configures       Sa MACS Demo Server    s MACS Event Logger  Sa MACS MAPI Service  S_mMacs Pager   Sa Messenger Trar  ams Software Shado    Man  Rs Net Logon Sup  So NetMeeting Remote    Enal All Tasks    Sa Network Connections Man Refresh    Bo eed ane Pees     el u    Properties      4 Extended A Standard   KZ    Start service MACS Event Logger on Local Computer Help                While starting the service  Windows XP displays the following message box     Service Control    Windows is attempting to start the following service on Local Computer       MACS Event Logger                Once the service is started  the message box will disappear     42 Micus Alarm and Control System    5 1 1 2 Windows NT    Getting Started    To start your MACS equipment module manually under Windows NT  login to your  MACS server  Then open the Services manager by clicking on Start   gt  Settings   gt     Control Panel  When you open the Control Panel  doublecli
55.  slot  name in the Slot Configuration dialog box and click on the Delete Slot push button   The system will respond with the following query        Slot Configuration       Pi Are you sure you want to delete this slot              To delete the slot  click on the Yes push button  To exit without deleting the slot  click  on the No push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 199    Configuration    7 6 6 4 View Slots    To view your MACS IO slots configuration  open the Slot Configuration utility main  dialog box and click on the View Slots push button  The system will create a configu   ration report and present it using the WordPad text editor  From within the editor  you  can save the report into a text file  print it  search for Keywords  cut and paste report  contents  and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The following picture illus   trates a typical report layout        10 Slots Configuration   Notepad  File Edit Format Yiew Help    nit name   Unit ID   Polling     Slot name    Slot type    Slot number   Adapter number   Slot ID     Point name   Point address   Point type   Point ID     Active text   Active severity   Active page     Inactive text     Inactive severity     Inactive page     Point name   Point address     MACS IO    PCI DIOs  PCI DIO8  1   0   1128    IN 2    1  digital input   101    ACTIVE  CRITICAL  YES    INACTIVE  WARNING  NO    Last 16 In  3          Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 6 7 MACS IO Plug in Boards    On
56.  specific supplement  documentation  provided with individual equipment modules     7 1 Color Configuration    Before configuring anything else  we suggest that you start with defining color combi   nations you wish to use when presenting equipment status on the computer screen     MACS presents status and control points and text messages using combinations of  foreground and background colors  You can define as many colors as you want   MACS does not impose any limitation on the number of colors  As you define your  color combinations  you assign them descriptions  such as BLACK ON GRAY or  CRITICAL ALARM  Later on  when you define your alarm points  you will use this  description to select colors to be used for active alarm points  inactive alarm points  and warning messages     You can add  modify  and delete all of your color definitions  As a minimum  the  system requires the following colors to be defined     e DEFAULT CRITICAL  e DEFAULT MAJOR  e DEFAULT MINOR  e DEFAULT WARNING    When you start defining your own colors  you will see that these four color definitions  already exist in your configuration  You can change foreground and background  combinations assigned to these colors  but you cannot delete them     Micus Alarm and Control System 107    Configuration    To define your own colors  you will use the MACS configuration utility called ColorCfg   Note that configuration utilities may not be installed on all workstations used to  operate MACS  In this chapter 
57.  specify the name of the new MACS node   The name is a 15 character long ASCII string  independent from  the host computer name     Database ID is a read only field that contains the database record ID  automat   ically assigned by the system  When adding a new node  this field  always contains zero     Computer Name   edit box allows you to enter the name of the MACS node host  computer  This name is subsequently used to resolve the node IP  address     The TCP IP networking must be able to translate the computer  name into an IP address of the nnn nnn nnn nnn form  If you don   t    Micus Alarm and Control System 139    Configuration    have the Domain Name System  DNS  service for your network   make sure that computer names for all of your MACS nodes  appear in the etc hosts file  which provides static name resolution  for your TCP IP network     ODBC Data Source Name    edit box allows you to enter the name of the ODBC data source  to use to open the MACS node database  You must configure the  ODBC data source under the same name on each workstation  you want to use to access this MACS node  To configure the  ODBC data source use your workstation native ODBC manager     Database Login Account    edit box allows you to enter the login account to use to open the  MACS node database     Database Login Password    edit box allows you to enter the login password to use to open the  MACS node database     Bitmap Files Path edit box allows you to enter the path to the folder th
58.  such  MACS GUI supports the  following standard MS Windows features     e Toolbar docking  e Toolbar hide and show  e Status bar hide and show    e About box    86 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 7 1 Toolbar Docking    You can use the toolbar docking to position the toolbar icons to any convenient spot  within the application main window  By default  the toolbar is docked along the top  edge of the window working area     6 7 2 Toolbar Control    Like many other MS Windows applications  the MACS GUI allows you to show or to  hide the toolbar  By default  the toolbar is always shown and docked along the top  edge of the main application window  If you want to hide it  click on the View push  button  and then click on the Toolbar menu item  If the toolbar is hidden  click on the  same menu item to show it      i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1  Jog    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager Event Log Yiew Archive Configuration Help    v Toolbar  aa    EE S   EI m J  i A   v Status Bar    6 7 3 Status Bar       Like most MS Windows applications  the MACS GUI allows you to show or to hide the  status bar  which shows a single line help message at the bottom of the main appli   cation window  By default  the status bar is always shown  If you want to hide it  click  on the View push button  and then click on the Status Bar menu item  If the status bar  is hidden  click on the same menu item to show it     dp Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1
59.  the X and Y  coordinates and point width W and height H  To add your point  click on the Add push  button  To save your point in the database  click on the Save push button     Your newly added point will look somewhat like this     E FRIDGE    8 11 2 Digital Output    To add a digital output point to you custom screen  do the following     e From the Source pull down list  select  O POINTS     e From the Server pull down list  select the equipment module that contains the point  you are interested in     e From the Unit pull down list  select the unit that contains the point you are inter   ested in     e From the Point pull down list  select the point you are interested in  In this example   make sure to select a digital output     Source   10 POINTS D   Server   SENTRY D 1  Unit   ELECTRALERT D 208  Point   FIRST D 6095    Type  Digital Input    At this point  the editor will indicate in the read only field Type whether you selected a  digital input  digital output  analog input or analog output point  At the same time  it will  present the display styles applicable to the selected point type     First  select the colors that you want to use for the active and for the inactive point  state  Note that the pulsed point state is ignored     Micus Alarm and Control System 279    Creating Custom Screens    Colors    Active Above    DEFAULT CRITICAL v  Inactive Within    DEFAULT WARNING e  Pulsed Below    DEFAULT WARNING    Show State    ACTIVE v    Next  select the point style
60. 04_30  2000_05_03  2000_05_04  2000_05_05  2000_05_07  2000_05_08  2000_05_09  2000_05_10  2000_05_11  2000 05 12       SHINAI KS KX  J       File delete in progress     Delete   Stop   Exit                     Micus Alarm and Control System 101    Commands  List of files  From date    To date    Select Files    File list    Delete    Stop    Progress bar    102    box allows you to select equipment log files to delete     fields contains the start date and time of the period for which you  want to delete equipment log files  When specifying the date and  time  use the same format as initially displayed in the field     field contains the end date and time of the period for which you  want to delete equipment log files  When specifying the date and  time  use the same format as initially displayed in the field     push button loads all equipment log files for the selected time  period     box contains all equipment log files for the specified time period   Each file has a checkbox  which is initially checked  If you dont  want to delete a particular file  deselect it by clicking on the  checkbox     push button starts the process of deleting the selected files   When you click on the button  the program prompts you with the    query        Delete Equipment Log         re you sure you want  to delete selected files              If you are sure that you want to delete the selected equipment log  files  click on Yes  Otherwise  click on No     push button terminates the process 
61. 1 Client Components    Hardware and system software requirements for the client components are   e A standard Pentium PC  with 128 MB of RAM     e An 800 by 600 resolution monitor for most of the screens  or a 1024 by 768  resolution monitor for the maps or other graphic intensive screens  and the MACS  display editor     e Network adapter or high speed modem  depending on the available TCP IP  network connectivity     e Windows XP Professional  Windows NT  or Windows 2000 operating system     e MS Access ODBC driver  MySQL client software and ODBC driver  or Oracle  database  client software and ODBC driver     4 16 2 Server Components    Hardware and system software requirements for the server components are        3  MACS software uses Open Database Connectivity  ODBC   which allows connectivity to any database for which  ODBC drivers are available  For the smaller installations  we recommend MS Access database  For the larger  installations  we recommend Oracle database because of its reliability  scalability  strong TCP IP networking fea   tures  and built in tools for the Internet web access  As a no cost alternative to Oracle  we also recommend  MySQL     Micus Alarm and Control System 35    Overview    36    A high end Pentium PC  with a minimum of 128 MB of RAM for the MS Access    database  or 512 MB of RAM for the Oracle database     An 800 by 600 resolution monitor for most of the screens  or a 1024 by 768  resolution monitor for the maps or other graphic intensiv
62. 128  7 2 4 Event Reporting       0 0 00 cece eee eee eee 128  7 2 5 View Event Logger    1 2    cc cece e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 130  7 3 Graphical User Interface Configuration                00 e ee eee eee 131  7 3 1 Add User Interface    135  7 3 2 Modify User Interface    136  7 3 3 Delete User Interface    136  7 3 4 View User Interfaces      0 0 00  cece eee eee eens 137  7 3 5 MACS Nodes Configuration           0  cece eee eee 137  7 3 5 1 Add MACS Node         0 0 e cece eee eee eee eee eee 139  7 3 5 2 Modify MACS Node eee ee eee eee eee eee eee 140  7 3 5 3 Delete MACS Node        00  cece eee eee eee eee nee 141  7 3 5 4 View MACS NodeS         00 0 cece eee eee eee 141   7 4 Pager Configuration            00 0c eee eens 142  LAA Add Ha0et 75 ae tages NEI EEN NEE aaa Ragen NR He ER 146  7 4 2 Modify Pager         2 0 eee eee eee eee eee 147  TAS Delete  Pager iseen ee SE bie ede a Baan ee Wel eine Ge ewe aca 147  TAA NIGW  Pagel uge waa tle a re a a alae RRE ea eae et aa  aa 148  7 4 5 Serial Port Configuration          00  c cee 149  7 4 5 1 Add Serial Port  e eh ENEE EES SEN EN Runs ce gon ge wha Ae 150  7 4 5 2 Modify Serial Port      0 0    cece eee 151  7 4 5 3 Delete Serial Port    152   7 4 6 Pager Event Reporting      152  7 4 7 Pager ServiceS     0    ccc eee eee eee ee een E 154  7 4 7 1 Add Pager Service      2 0    cece eee eee 156  7 4 7 2 The Modify Pager Service         00 00 cece eee eee eee 157  7 4 7 3 Delete Pager Service      0    cee eee 1
63. 4 2 Modify Pager    The Configure Server command allows you to change an existing pager configuration   In the current MACS software release  pager configuration changes take effect on the  first subsequent Windows NT service startup  Therefore  after making changes in your  pager configuration  make sure to restart the corresponding Windows NT service     To change the configuration of an existing pager  highlight the pager name in the list   and click the Configure Server push button in the Pager Configuration utility main  dialog box     The Modify Server dialog box has the same layout as the Add Server dialog box     7 4 3 Delete Pager    To delete an existing pager configuration  highlight the name of the pager you want to  delete  and click on the Delete Server push button in the Pager Configuration utility  main dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 147    Configuration    The following dialog box will pop up     MACS Pager Configuration x       This server may be used for pager services   Are you sure you want to delete it                    To delete the selected pager  click on the Yes push button  To exit the dialog box  without deleting the pager  click on the No push button     7 4 4 View Pager    To view your present pager configuration  select your pager from the list in the MACS  Pager Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the View Server push button     The system will create a report and present it as a text file using the WordPad text 
64. 4 View BitMapS     2    cece eee eee 258   8 8 3 Selecting Bitmaps        0 0 00  cece eee eee 259   8 9 Using Enumerated PointS           0 00  e eee eee eee eee eee 261  8 9 1 Enumerated Sets      2    a cece eee eee eee eee eee ee een a na 262  8 9 1 1 Add Enumerated Set      0    0c e eee cee eee eee eee 263   8 9 1 2 Configure Enumerated Set            002 00 c eee eee eens 264   8 9 1 3 Delete Enumerated Set    2    0  0c cece eee eee eee 264   8 9 1 4 View Enumerated Sets         0 00 cece eee eee eee 264   8 9 2 Enumerated Set Values 0    ccc eee eee eee eee 266  8 9 2 1 Add Enumerated Value    1    0 00 cee cee eee eee 267   8 9 2 2 Configure Enumerated Value eens eee eens 268   8 9 2 3 Delete Enumerated Value    1    0    cece eee 268    vi Micus Alarm and Control System    Table of Contents    8 9 2 4 View Enumerated Values            00 e eee eee eee eee 268   8 9 3 Selecting Enumerated Geis 0000 eee eee eee eee 270  8 10 Using Actions 2 veer a EE ET ate 2 eta eens ee eee oe ete 271  8 10 1 Managing Actions          0  ccc eee eee 271  8 10 11 Add Action See Za E ela tia eee Pie es Hage ere 273   8 10 1 2 Configure Action    eee eee 274   8 10 1 3 Delete Action       2    cece eee eee 274   8 10 1 4 View ACtiONS     0    0  cee eee 274   8 10 2 Selecting Actions 0    cece eee 275  8 11 Using Display Styles               cece eee 277  S111  Digital le EE EE EE EE 277  8 11 2 Digital Output    eee 279  8 11 3 Baseball Switch    eee eee 281  8 11 4 Analog Point Verti
65. 57  7 4 7 4 View Pager Services       00 00 eee eee 158   7 4 8 Pager  USCIS  eege ee SE bie alin wi Bue a atin in 16 E EE E wala 159  7 4 8 1 Pager MessageS      0    ccc eee eee eee eee 161  7 4 8 2 Event Details    eee 165  14 8 3 Delete User eege REN EE EN EEN EN Shee EN REENEN BEER E 167   7 5 E mail and Fax Configuration           0  000s e eee eee ee eee 168  7 5 1 Add MAPI Interface       0 0 00  cece eee eee eens 174  7 5 2 Modify MAPI Interface      0    0 00 cee eee eee eee 175  7 5 3 Delete MAPI Interface         0    0c eee eee eee 176  7 5 4 View MAPI Interface    176    iv Micus Alarm and Control System    Table of Contents    7 5 5 MAPI Event Reporting        00 00 e eee eee ene eee eee 177  7 5 6 MAPI Message Recipients    000  e eee ene eee eee eee eee 178  7 5 6 1 MAPI Messages         0 0  c cece eee eee eee eee eee en eeee 181   7 5 6 2 Event Details eseu ENEE nena eee eee ei ee ae 184   7 5 6 3 Delete User      0    cece eee eee eee 186   7 5 7 MAPI ACCOUNT ii cars ER EIER tee ee eee ae titiara EISE 186   7 6 MACS IO Configuration             00  eee 188  7 6 1 Add Service        00  cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eneeee 192  7 6 2 Modify Service        00 0 cece eee eee eee E Ea 193  7 6 3 Delete Service      2    cece eee eee eee eee een eee 194  7 6 4 View Service    0    cee ene eee eee 194  7 6 5 Event Reporting NN cea eee ke eae ee ee ee 195  7 6 6 Slot Configuration 1 0    00  ccc eee eee 196  7 86 61 ET EE 198   7 6 6 2 Modify let oa see ninn e
66. C  MACS Programs  d iP PagerCfg  MacsMenu    i  an  Microsoft Developer Network  Microsoft Visual C   6 0  w Paint a  3 Real  Sot  Data Sources  ODBC 3 Winzip    3 MSN Messenger 6 0  All Programs  D  G  RealOne Player  Log Off g Turn OFF Computer  Start CD88 7 35 Pm       If your system is configured to provide access to the configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI   you can also start the MAPI configuration utility by selecting config   uration utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu or by clicking  the Configuration button on the toolbar     Micus Alarm and Control System 171    Configuration    D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager Event Log Yiew Archive Confi    Ss  amp  BEI es Ae d    Select Configuration Utility             The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities            Color Definitions  Demo Server Configuration  Display Editor   DSR 4800 Configuration  Event Log Configuration a  File Copy Configuration   Gl Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration   IPG Quality Control Configuration   Liebert RCM8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration   MPEG Monitor Confiauration EI    Cancel                     Select MAPI Configuration and click on the Open push button  or simply double click  on the MAPI Conf
67. CTRALERT    Second    Second    Second  Second  Second    Second    LOG FILE OPEN    MacsSnmp  gent Rev  3 0 0 SERVER MACS SNMP Agent    MacsLogger Rev  3 0 1 SERVER LOGGER STARTUP  MacsSentry Rev  3 2 0 SERVER SENTRY STARTUP    LOGIN Michael FROM dosite   SESSION WITH Michael FROM  ACTIVATED   SESSION WITH Michael FROM  SESSION WITH Michael FROM  DEACTIVATED   SESSION WITH Michael FROM  SESSION WITH Michael FROM  ACTIVATED   DEACTIVATED   ACTIVATED   LOGIN Michael FROM qaq  SESSION WITH Michael FROM  SESSION WITH Michael FROM  DEACTIVATED   SESSION WITH Michael FROM  SESSION WITH Michael FROM  SESSION WITH Michael FROM    dositej    dositej  dositej    dositej  dositej    dositej    qaq OPEN    OPEN    CLOSED  OPEN    CLOSED  OPEN    CLOSED    qaq CLOSED    dositej  dositej    OPEN  CLOSED    e       For Help  press F1       6 6 Equipment Log          For some types of equipment  your MACS records all information exchanges with the  equipment in a separate set of files  referred to as the Equipment Log  The format of  data stored in these files is equipment dependent     Typically  your system will be configured to maintain a separate equipment log for  each unit  Thus  to view the equipment log files  you will have to select the unit you are  interested in  and then to open a daily equipment log file     To enter the View Equipment Log command click on the Event Log pull down menu    and select View Equipment Log        Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1  File Mo
68. Configuration    The MAPI Users dialog box has the following layout     MAPI Messages    Add User    Name    MAPI Address    Delete User       MAPI Users       Anonymous FAx 4933623 MAPI Messages  Michael Bankovitch FAX  4933623    Stewart Jones stewart company                View User    Delete User      User Data    Name  Stewart Jones  MAPI address   stewart company com    Exit               push button allows you to define a list of messages for a given  MAPI recipient  To define user messages  select user by high   lighting his or her name in the list box  and click on the MAPI Mes   sages push button     push button allows you to add new MAPI recipients to the list  To  add a new user  fill in the Name and MAPI Address fields and  then click on the Add User push button  Note that this dialog box  does not allow you to modify user name and address  You can  only delete a user and then add it again     edit box allows you to specify a user name when adding a new  user to the MAPI interface configuration     edit box allows you to specify an address when adding a new user  to the MAPI interface configuration  This address can take one of  the two forms  an e mail address of the form name provider  or  fax number  of the form FAX 5551234  Based on the submitted  address  the MAPI automatically selects an e mail or fax service     push button allows you to delete an existing user from the list  To  delete a user  select his or her name from the list and click on the  Delete 
69. Creating Custom Screens    8 7 5 Digital Input Display Styles    When you select a digital input point  the Display Editor will present a choice of  display styles depicted in the following picture     Display Styles  l Read Only F Scientific       e      JAIR CONDITIONER    T       LIAIR CONDITIONER    Oo    e  ke ER  CH m      E       RH      Styles available to draw digital inputs are     e Solid rectangle proportional to the point name length   e Transparent rectangle proportional to the point name length  e Solid custom size rectangle   e Transparent custom size rectangle   e Solid half width rectangle   e Transparent half width rectangle   e Solid full width rectangle   e Transparent full width rectangle    e Line    248 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    e Round LED   e Square LED   e Switch   e Baseball switch  e Door    e Bitmap    8 7 6 Digital Output Display Styles    When you select a digital output point  the Display Editor will present a choice of  display styles depicted in the following picture     Display Styles   l Scientific  M FRIDGE CH  M FRIDGE    M FRIDGE    H FRIDGE    LI   E    i  Mi FRIDGE 2    a  D  bi  a  a      gt        MFRIDGE  FRIDGE  FRIDGE    is    be    Styles available to draw digital outputs are     e Solid rectangle proportional to the point name length  e Transparent rectangle proportional to the point name length  e Solid custom size rectangle    e Transparent custom size rectangle    Micus Alarm and Control Sy
70. ER  AUDIBLE   AUDIBLE   AUDIBLE   FANS   FANS   FANS   HPA M_FL  HPA M_FL  HPA M_FL       COOLING ON   COOLING OFF   AIR CONDITIONING P  ALARM SIGNAL ON  ALARM SIGNAL OFF  AUDIBLE PULSED  MACHINE ROOM FANS  MACHINE ROOM FANS  FANS PULSED  TORONTO HPA A PROD  TORONTO HPA IS NOR  POINT PULSED    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 5 6 1 MAPI Messages    After you define a list of your MAPI recipients  you have to specify a list of messages  for each recipient     Your MACS will monitor a potentially large number of alarm  status and control points   While configuring your equipment alarms  status and control points  you will define  point names and text to display for each alarm condition  change in status and other  states  For example  digital inputs can be active or inactive  Digital outputs can be  active  inactive or pulsed  Analog inputs can be within limits  above upper threshold or  below lower threshold  For each of these states you can specify a text message to be  displayed  but you can also specify whether to include this particular point state in  MAPI messages  This is done simply by checking a check box associated with the  desired point state  Note that in this software release the MAPI interface shares the  activation checkbox with the pager  The following picture illustrates a typical digital  input configuration           Digital Input Point Definition    Mode  Name   Main Hydro    Permanent  Address   A Momentary    Call Home  Duration Timer
71. Event logger computer name   VUK D    Event logger protocol port    4000             GUI computer name       pull down list contains all workstations  that presently have login  access to the MACS  If you are adding a new workstation  just  type in your new workstation name  If you want to grant access to  a workstation already on the list  select the workstation name from  the list     The TCP IP networking must be able to translate the workstation  name into an IP address of the nnn nnn nnn nnn form  If you don   t  have the Domain Name System  DNS  service for your network   make sure that all of your workstation and server names appear in  the etc hosts file  which provides static name resolution for your  TCP IP network     Event logger service name    pull down list contains all presently configured event loggers  This  list allows you to select the event logger for which you want the to  grant access  On smaller MACS installations  you will typically  have only a single name on that list  If your MACS consists of sev   eral regional event loggers  you will see all of their names in the  list     Event logger computer name    pull down list contains all presently configured MACS servers   This list allows you to specify the name of the computer on which    Micus Alarm and Control System 135    Configuration    the event logger service runs  On smaller MACS installations   you will typically have only a single name on that list  If your  installation consists of several 
72. IO service to your system configu   ration     allows you to delete an existing MACS IO service from your sys   tem configuration     allows you to specify computers and programs on your network  that will receive event reports from the MACS IO service being  configured     allows you to configure MACS IO slots and points for the selected  MACS IO module     allows you to create a text report that contains your MACS IO  module present configuration     exits the MACS IO Configuration utility     Micus Alarm and Control System 191    Configuration    7 6 1 Add Service    When you run the MACS  O Configuration utility for the first time  the list of existing  MACS IO modules  will be empty  and you will have to add a new module to your  system configuration     To add a new MACS IO module  click on the Add Service button in the MACS IO  Configuration main dialog box  and the New Server Configuration dialog box will  appear        New Server Configuration    Service name   Computer name   Protocol port   0    Text Event Log      Text log path        Binary Event Log     Binary log path        Cancel                   The dialog box has the following layout     Service name edit box allows you to specify the name of your MACS IO service   This name will appear in all event reports originated by the ser   vice     The name you select must be the same as the name you speci   fied while installing the MACS IO Windows NT service  The  MACS IO Windows NT service uses this name when st
73. ITEJ Dositej O Macs programs TicketcTfg  exe    Image Video Monitor Configuration  D  MACSNPrograms Imaget fg  exe    GI Encoder Configuration                218 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 8 Local User Interface Options    There are some configuration options that you can select locally to set up the MACS  user interface on your own workstation  These options include     e Access to the on line copy of the MACS User   s Manual  which is this book    e Selecting sounds to play when alarm messages are received     Unlike other configuration parameters  which are stored in the system configuration  database  these options are saved in the client workstation Registry  Therefore   operators can safely change them at any time  without altering the contents of the  system database  Changing the local user interface settings will not affect the  operation of the GUI on other workstations     Local GUI settings are accessible directly from the MACS main GUI  They do not  require access to MACS configuration utilities  To set up the options  select Configu   ration   gt  Options from the main menu      i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog View Archive Configuration Help       SEET EESE EE    The User Interface Options dialog box will pop up        User Interface Options       Critical alarm sound   D  MACS Config S oundCritical way    Major alarm sound    D  MACS Config SoundMajor  way    Minor al
74. J 4446   4 Macs DEMO No DOSITEJ DOSITEJ 4448   5 LOGGER YES KAVERS KAVERS 4446   6 LOGGER YES NTL NTL 4446   7 LOGGER YES Icius Icius 4448   8 LOGGER YES MACS Macs 4446   9 LOGGER YES RASTKO DOSITEJ 4448   10 LOGGER YES VUK DOSITEJ 4448   T2 LOGGER YES DOSITEJ VUK 4000  For Help  press F1          7 3 5 MACS Nodes Configuration    Your installation may consist of one or more MACS servers  Since MACS is a fully  distributed system  even individual MACS services may be installed on different  computers  For example  your equipment modules and event logger may be installed  on one computer  while your email and pager services may reside on another  computer  Servers and other computers on which MACS services run are referred to  as MACS nodes     Micus Alarm and Control System 137    Configuration    While configuring your system  you must instruct your GUIs which network address  and which database to use when accessing a given MACS node  and where to find  bitmap drawings and executable programs  MACS nodes are configured using the  User Interface Configuration Utility     To configure your list of MACS nodes  click on the MACS Nodes push button  The  MACS Node Selection dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog box has the  following layout        J    X    m  MACS Node Selection  MONTREAL  YUK Configure Node  TORONTO  DOSITEJ  Add Node    Delete Node  View Nodes          Exit                   The scrollable list box on the left hand side contains all presently confi
75. MACS servers  you will see all of  their names in the list  If you are adding a new server  just type in  your new server computer name  If you want to grant access to a  server already on the list  select the computer name from the list     Event logger protocol port    edit box allows you to enter the TCP IP protocol port to use when  connecting to the selected event logger     Connect on startup    check box determines whether the GUI running on a workstation  being configured will login to the specified event logger automati   cally upon startup  Typically  if you have only a single event log   ger  you will configure the GUI to login automatically  If you have  more than one event logger to monitor  you may prefer to login to  each of them manually     Note that your GUI can login to any number of event loggers  simultaneously  In such cases  your GUI will collate events from  all loggers being monitored     Save push button allows you to grant a specified workstation access to  the selected event logger and close the dialog box     Exit push button allows you to exit the dialog box without changing a  workstation access to MACS     7 3 2 Modify User Interface    The Modify User Interface command allows you to change an existing user interface  configuration  To change the configuration of an existing user interface  highlight its  workstation name in the GU  Computer list  select the event source in the Event  Source list  and then click the Modify GUI push button     T
76. MAJOR  color ID  2  Foreground  OCB   Background  OCB       DEFAULT MINOR  color ID  3  Foreground  OCB   Background  0 128 B       DEFAULT WARNING  color ID  4  Foreground  255   R  255     G  OCB   Background  128   R  128 G  128  B       RED ON RED  color ID  5  Foreground  255     R  OCG  OCB   Background  255   R  OCG  OCB       BLACK ON GRAY  color ID  6  Foreground  OCR  OCG  OCB   Background  192     R  192 G  192 B           Micus Alarm and Control System 115    Configuration    7 2 Event Logger Configuration    In its standard configuration  MACS maintains a centralized event log  which contains  event reports reported by all system components  The event log is a set of text files    automatically created on a daily basis  These files are created by the dedicated  component of the MACS  referred to as the Event Logger     The Event Logger is a Windows NT service  specifically designed to do the following   e To create a new event log file every day at midnight   e To append all new event reports to the current log file   e To accept login and logout requests from the MACS users on the network    e To forward event reports to all active user interfaces  and to other MACS modules  such as the pager service or trouble ticketing service    Your MACS system consists of the equipment modules and user interface GUIs  The  equipment modules monitor the attached equipment and detect alarm conditions and  changes in the equipment status  On each alarm or status change  the eq
77. MAPI interface  use the MAPI Configuration utility program  MapiCfg  Depending on the way your system is administered  this utility may or may  not be accessible from the MACS main GUI      To access the MAPI configuration utility from your workstation desktop  click on Start     gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt MapiCfg        1  Some network administrators do not want to make configuration utilities accessible to all users  In such case   these utilities are installed only on the workstations used by the system administrators  Others prefer to make  configuration programs accessible from the MACS main user interface  The choice is yours  and the way you  access configuration utilities is a field configurable option     170 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration               Set Program Access and Defaults  W Windows Catalog      Windows Update   ACL for Broadband      Launch RealOne Player    CD winzip   T  Accessories       ran Games  gt                    Internet  Internet Explorer     nl PrintMe Internet Printing  gt  iP ColorCfg     E mail    Outlook Express H sis ep EE  Meen Mes  zap   gt     fi Democfg  H SoundMax  gt    OD ech  SW Spider Solitaire  3 Startup  gt    OD Set  h Fav i  i gang  r Adobe Reader 6 0  i LogCfg    Internet Explorer i  MacsEditor  MSN Explorer MacsManager  Lei Notepad         d V   G  Outlook Express ii MacsMenu  i IPGCfg s  Remote Assistance ih MacsUtl     windows Media Player tid MapiCfg  E WordPad Ki Windows Messenger   JLocation  
78. Micus Real Time Software Inc   5863 Leslie St  Suite 127  Toronto  Ontario   M2H 1J8   Canada   Tel   416  493 3623   Fax   416  502 9083  www micus ca          Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS     User   s Manual    Revision 3 8          es E  Other switches       es A Other er A  i quipment        Telephony sm  Switch an  LH  STE Remote Site  f Monitors      DROE  Switch H  G    MACS Server      Remote access to  your in house  network m    L aj L L Workstations             Table of Contents    1 Revision History        e cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeees 1  2 Reference Documents ve EN NENNEN eee eens 3  3 Jay deele le EEN 5  3 1 What te MACS  erg ecco EE Oe eked E Ee ee Dam de ead Ne E 5   3 2 Why MACS     co cc  cei EES eee bee TREI tate eee eee eed 6   3 3 What can you do with MACS           20    eee eee 7   3 4 How does it Work          000s cee 8   3 5 Configuration ENEE cece eee eet ENEE eee eee eee 9   3 6 Event Log Management    9   3 7 Equipment Files Management    10   3 8 Troubl   TICK OES ur Tee iain ET ET ee 10   3 9 Multiuser Support    10   3 10 Remote Access    10   3 11 Networking  ie cee eee tee eee en eee ee eee ee 11   3 12 Online Diagnostics    11   d EE oaen eege 13  4 1 MACS Architecture SNE des cece sad cette sg eel tee NN oe ee es 13   4 1 1 MACS SOrvers esi EE wise te dee ENEE ace EIS aria de erat a i won deli ER EI SI easter a ee 14   4 1 2 MACS Clients see cece NNN as sated eae ede ENN emanates 16   4 2 Status And Control Points    17   4 3 Statu
79. My Online Status b             Accounts              In the Options dialog box  click on the Security tab        General Read Receipts Send Compose      Signatures Security Connection Maintenance       Virus Protection     Select the Internet Explorer security zone to use   g    Internet zone  Less secure  but more functional      Restricted sites zone  More secure    O Warn me when other applications try to send mail as me     C  Do not allow attachments to be saved or opened that could  potentially be a virus        Secure Mail    H Digital IDs  also called certificates  are special    documents that allow you to prove your identity in    electronic transactions  Digital IDs       To digitally sign messages or receive encrypted    messages  you must have a digital ID  Get Digital ID        C  Encrypt contents and attachments for all outgoing messages       C  Digitally sign all outgoing messages          Micus Alarm and Control System 169    Configuration    In the Security property page  make sure that the checkbox marked Warn me when  other applications try to send mail as me is not checked  Click on the Apply push  button and close all Outlook Express windows     To process event reports and create e mail or fax messages  your MAPI interface  must receive them from your event logger  To learn how to configure your event  logger to forward event reports to the MAPI  please refer to the Event Logger Configu   ration description earlier in this manual     To configure your 
80. N RSM 3 RSM 3 OUTPUTS FANS  SENTRY TORONTO  552 CONTROLS HP amp  M_FL    Details Delete Add  Deg   De      All MAPI events   Server  Unit  Slot  Point     MACS DEMO INPUTS AIR CONDITIONER      MACS DEMO DEMO_2 OUTPUTS BATHROOM T  MACS DEMO DEMO_2 OUTPUTS BEDROOM  MACS DEMO DEMO_2 OUTPUTS FRIDGE    MACS DEMO DEMO_2 OUTPUTS KITCHEN    MACS DEMO DEMO_2 OUTPUTS MAIN ENTRANCE  MACS EXEC MACS EXEC EXEC 0244 IN CBC NEWS     MACS IO MACS I0 PCI DIO8 First 16 Out   MACS IO MACS IO PCI DIO8 IN 2   MACS IO MACS IO PCI DIO8 Last 16 In   MACS IO MACS IO PCI DIO8 Last 16 Out  NUCLEUS II dummy ALARMS 95 C NET CLOCK  NUCLEUS II dummy ALARMS 95 C NET STREAM  NIIDI FIIS I ch mmm   l ARMS Op C NFET SYNC    Details Exit                      182 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    This dialog box is divided into two sections  The bottom section  named All MAPI  events  contains a list of all events that can be assigned as MAPI messages  The top  section  designated as MAPI messages assigned to this user  contains a list of all  events already assigned as the selected user MAPI messages     When you add a new user to your MAPI configuration  the list of MAPI messages  assigned to this user will be empty  To select which MAPI messages your new user  will receive  simply highlight one or more messages in the list of all MAPI events  and  then click on the Add push button  The selected MAPI messages will appear in the top  list     Once you configure your user messages  you can always 
81. O slots   e Input and output points for each slot    While the MACS server comes with the pre installed hardware  you still need to adjust  your system configuration to your application requirements  To configure MACS IO   use the MACS IO Configuration utility program  OCfg  Depending on the way your  SEN is administered  this utility may or may not be accessible from the MACS main  GUI     To access the MACS IO configuration utility from your workstation desktop  click on  Start   gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt lOCfg        1  Some network administrators do not want to make configuration utilities accessible to all users  In such case   these utilities are installed only on the workstations used by the system administrators  Others prefer to make  configuration programs accessible from the MACS main user interface  The choice is yours  and the way you  access configuration utilities is a field configurable option     188 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration                     Set Program Access and Defaults  W Windows Catalog   EI Windows Update   ACL for Broadband          Launch RealOne Player  Michael  CD winzip    Accessories  gt   e eege E    cames     d SET      PrintMe Internet Printing d iP DemoCfg  Ka Set H apen ep Men Mes  290 ri EN IPGCfg  EH Soundmax  gt    Op  eet  o Spider Solitaire  gt   Sgt e i Logctg  i een  I  Adobe Reader 6 0 EN MacsEditor  x  Internet Explorer iP MacsManager   a jens we MSN Explorer EN MacsMenu   GQ  Outlook Express iP MacsU
82. PANEL COMMUNICATION  IPG RASTKO COMMUNICATION  MACS DEMO DEMO_1 COMMUNICATION  MACS DEMO DEMO_2 COMMUNICATION  MACS DEMO DEMO_2 INPUTS AIR CONDITIONER e  MACS DEMI DEM   OUITPHITS R  THRNNM    Details Exit                     This dialog box is divided into two sections  The bottom section  named Al pager  events  contains a list of all events that can be assigned as pager messages  The top  section  designated as Pager messages assigned to this user  contains a list of all  events already assigned as the selected user pager messages     When you add a new user to your pager configuration  the list of pager messages  assigned to this user will be empty  To select which pager messages your new user  will receive  simply highlight one or more messages in the list of all pager events  and  then click on the Add push button  The selected pager messages will appear in the top  list     Micus Alarm and Control System 163    Configuration    Once you configure your user messages  you can always change the list by adding  new messages or deleting already assigned messages  To delete a message from  the selected user list  highlight the message in the Pager messages assigned to this  user list and click on the Delete push button     In each list  pager events are presented using the server  unit  slot and point name  If  you want to see the text messages assigned to a given pager event  highlight the  corresponding event in either the top or bottom list  and click on the corresponding
83. Read Only F Scientific    TEMERATURE    TEMERATI    TEMERATUF       TEMERATURE       Next  you need to add your point to your custom screen  Place the mouse pointer to  the location in the custom screen where you want to position the top left corner of your  point  Press the right button and drag the mouse to create a rectangle which repre   sents your point location  As you drag the mouse  the coordinates and size of your  point rectangle will show up in the Point Attributes  Typically  you will draw an approx   imate square on the screen  and then manually adjust its coordinates and size     Point Attributes   X  en el   nien w   50    Options   iw   Max 0 00  Name  pow   Min  om    Next  you need to define the maximum and minimum values for the histogram  To do  so  use the Max and Min edit boxes  Note that the values that you enter will depend on  the nature of the point being monitored     To add your baseball switch to your custom screen  click on the Add push button  To  save it in the database  click on the Save push button     You can add ticks and numbers to you background image to enhance the appearance  and readability of the histogram  Assume that the background of your custom screen  contained a drawing like this     Micus Alarm and Control System 285    Creating Custom Screens       AUDIO 1           With the careful positioning on the screen  your newly added histogram will look  somewhat like this        AUDIO 1          8 11 5 Modifying Points    You can mod
84. Selection  Equipment Type  Unit Name   COMSTREAM TORONT  IV CTRL PANEL dao   IV MONITOR OTTAWA  INUCLEUSI  0O MONTREAL  RMS 3  SENTRY       Cancel      The Equipment Selection dialog box has the following layout                    Equipment Type scrollable list contains the names of all equipment types   Remember that the equipment log is maintained only for some  equipment  If you select equipment for which there is no equip   ment log  the system will not find any equipment log files     When you select the equipment type  the system will display the    94 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    names of all units of that type in the Unit Name list     Unit Name is a scrollable list that contains the names of all units of the  selected equipment type  As you change your equipment type  selection  the list of unit names is updated accordingly     Select push button confirms your equipment unit selection and closes  the window   Cancel push button allows you to exit the Copy Equipment Log command    without selecting any equipment     If the equipment log for the selected equipment cannot be found  the system will not  list any equipment log files  If your equipment unit selection is valid  you can use the  Copy Equipment Log dialog box to archive your files     Copy Equipment Log    List of files  Destination directory     From date   25 Jan 2000 00 00 00                  To date   25 Jan 2004 23 59 59 Sei  Gent                UJ  watts  mn                             
85. T IRD RECOVERED E  Pulsed below limits text  P                   Point Identification group box contains point identifiers  which are the server  unit   slot and point names     Server name field contains the name of the Windows NT service that originates  the message     Micus Alarm and Control System 165    Configuration    Unit name    Slot name    Point name  Pager Messages    field contains the name of the equipment unit that originates the  message     field contains the name of the slot within the equipment that origi   nates the message  Many communication equipment devices  have slots  which are used to install equipment plug in modules   Equipment that does not have slots is considered a single slot  equipment  meaning that all components are located within a sin   gle  monolithic unit     field contains the name of the point that originates the message     group box contains a text field and a Page checkbox for each  point state  A Page checkbox indicates to the MACS whether or  not to include the text in the text field in a page  If checked  the  text will be sent  if unchecked  the text will not be sent  If the text  field is empty for a given state  the system will not report point    transition to that state 17    Active above limits text    field contains the text to include in the event report when a digital  point becomes active  or when an analog point value exceeds the  upper threshold  If the associated checkbox is checked  the same  text will be included
86. TRALERT Second DEACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 20 52 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej CLOSED   12 07 2003 12 21 03 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej OPEN   12 07 2003 12 21 10 M ELECTRALERT Second ACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 21 12 W ELECTRALERT Second DEACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 21 14 M ELECTRALERT Second ACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 24 14 I LOGGER LOGIN Michael FROM qaq   12 07 2003 12 24 36 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej CLOSED   12 07 2003 12 24 43 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM qaq OPEN   12 07 2003 12 24 44 W ELECTRALERT Second DEACTIVATED   12 07 2003 12 24 44 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM qaq CLOSED   12 07 2003 12 25 00 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej OPEN   12 07 2003 12 25 34 I ELECTRALERT SESSION WITH Michael FROM dositej CLOSED v   lt   I  gt   For Help  press F1                26 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 7 Pager    Any status change or alarm message may be configured to activate the paging  system  Based on the event being reported  the pager selects  from the database  a  list of responsible personnel and sends pager messages to all individuals on the list     The standard MACS pager uses the Telocator Alphanumeric Input Protocol  TAP    which is the most commonly used paging protocol  If the local paging company uses  some other protocol  the pager module may need modifications to support the commu   nication protocol used by the paging company     4 8 E mail and Fax 
87. UCLEUS  NUCLEUS  NUCLEUS  NUCLEUS  NUCLEUS  NUCLEUS       File Edit Format wiew Help    MACS DEMO  MACS DENO    II  II  II  II  II  II    TORONTO  TORONTO  MONTREAL  MONTREAL  MONTREAL  MONTREAL  MONTREAL  MONTREAL  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  RSH 3  VANCOUVER  VANCOUVER  VANCOUVER  VANCOUVER  VANCOUVER  VANCOUVER    7 4 8 1 Pager Messages    INPUTS  OUTPUTS  ALARMS 95  ALARMS 95  ALARHS 95  ALARMS 95  ALARMS 95  ALARMS 95  RSH 3 INPUTS  RSH 3 INPUTS  RSM 3 INPUTS  RSH 3 INPUTS  RSM 3 INPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSM 3 OUTPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSH 3 OUTPUTS  RSM 3 OUTPUTS  016   016   016   016   016    p16    AIR CONDITIONER  MAIN ENTRANCE  C NET CLOCK  C NET STREAM  C NET SYNC  FORWARD POWER  REFLECTED POWER  SCM ALARMS   BACK DOOR  HEATING   HYDRO   HYDRO   LOBBY   AIR CONDITIONER  AIR CONDITIONER  AUDIBLE   AUDIBLE   AUDIBLE   FANS   FANS   FANS   HPA M_FL  HPA M_FL  HPA H_FL  PRO ALRH  PRO ALRM  RMOD ALR    COOLING IS 0 ja  DOOR IS CLOS  Cnet Clock R  Cnet Strean  Cnet Sync  R  Low Forward  High Reflect  Station Cont  DELIVERY DOO  TEMPERATURE  COMMERCIAL P  COMMERCIAL P  FRONT DOOR 0  COOLING ON  AIR CONDITIO  ALARM SIGNAL  ALARM SIGNAL  AUDIBLE PULS  MACHINE ROOM  MACHINE ROOM  FANS PULSED  TORONTO HPA  TORONTO HPA  POINT PULSED  TORONTO PROT  TORONTO PROT  TARANTA BEST  v    GES       After you define a list of your pager users  you have to specify a list of messages for    e
88. User push button  The following dialog box will pop up     Micus Alarm and Control System 179    Configuration       MAPI Users       Pi Are you sure you want to delete this user              To delete the selected user  click on the Yes push button  To exit  without deleting the user  click on the No push button     View User push button allows you to view a list of all possible MAPI mes   sages assigned to the selected recipient  To view the list  select  the user name by highlighting it in the list box  and then click on  the View User push button  The system will create a report con   taining all possible messages assigned to the selected user  and  present that report using the WordPad text editor  From within the  editor  you can view the report  print it or save it in a text file  You  can also search for keywords  cut and paste selected sections   and perform other functions typical od WordPad     A typical report layout is depicted in the following figure        Wilks    FRONT DOOR OPEN  FRONT DOOR CLOSED      Michael Bankovitch   Notepad  File Edit Format Weu Help    RSM 3  RSM 3       RSM 3 INPUTS  RSM 3 INPUTS    LOBBY  LOBBY       RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3    RSM 3  CONTROLS  CONTROLS  CONTROLS    RSM  TORONTO SS2  TORONTO SS2  TORONTO SS2    180    RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3  RSM 3    OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS  OUTPUTS    AIR CONDITIONER  AIR CONDITIONER  AIR CONDITION
89. Vertical Bar          Horizontal Bar    The numerical reading from analog points can be dis   played using an integer  decimal or scientific notation        er The numerical values for the output points can be set  from an edit box     a Some analog points can have a fixed set of values that  BRAVO  can be mapped into a list of names  For example  TV  SPACE channel numbers can be mapped into the corresponding    Famity Channel   TV channel names  In such a case  instead of displaying  numerical values  the screens will contain the associated  names  Each name can be displayed in a different color     Some analog output points can be set to a fixed set of  values  These values can be mapped into a list of  names  For example  TV channel numbers can be       S   Seen mapped into the corresponding TV channel names  In   ami anne   R   Showcase such a case  instead of entering numbers  the values  can be selected from a drop down list of the associated  names     244 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    To monitor analog values over time  points may be pre   sented using scrolling graphs  Each time a new analog  value is sampled  it gets added to the right end of the  graph  Once the end of the working rectangle is reached   the graph starts scrolling to the left     Analog values below lower threshold  within limits and  above upper threshold may be represented using differ   ent colors     Two scrolling graph styles are available  a transparent  graph st
90. W Windows Catalog       Windows Update   AOL for Broadband  Q  Launch RealOne Player    CD winzip     Accessories                 Set Program Access and Defaults                                 Internet  nl Games  gt   Internet Explorer    PrintMe Internet Printing D mi ColorCfg  E mail  Ve Outlook Express     as 650_651_mes0_mes2_740      d Democfa  EH SoundMax  gt    GP Paco  oe Spider Solitaire  H Startup  gt    FP Pet  i Gait  I Adobe Reader 6 0 fi LogCfg  S   Internet Explorer mi MacsEditor  Lei SS wv MSN Explorer iP MacsManager  otepa   A  Outlook Express  i MacsMenu     i IPGCfg eo Remote Assistance if  Macsuti       windows Media Player D Mapicfo Location  C  MACS Proarams  A WordPad 43 Windows Messenger EH Menucfg  d mi PagerCfg  MacsMenu     M  Microsoft Developer Network V  EH Microsoft Visual C   6 0  gt   Paint   T  Real  gt   a Data Sources  ODBC 3 winzip  gt     J   MSN Messenger 6 0  Q  RealOne Player         ee    OR 8 11PM       The main Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box  has the layout depicted in the following picture     214 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration       x       Macs Configuration Utilities           Color Definitions Add  Demo Server Configuration   Display Editor    DSA 4800 Configuration Modify    Event Log Configuration  File Copy Configuration  GI Encoder Configuration bal    View   Exit    Delete    A                      The list box contains the names of the utilities presently acc
91. ach user     Your MACS will monitor a potentially large number of alarm  status and control points   While configuring your equipment alarms and status and control points  you will define  point names and text to display for each alarm condition or change in status  For  example  digital inputs can be active or inactive  Digital outputs can be active  inactive  or pulsed  Analog inputs can be within limits  above upper threshold or below lower  threshold  For each of these states you can specify a text message to be displayed   but you can also specify whether this particular point state will activate the pager  This  is done simply by checking a check box associated with the desired point state  The  following picture illustrates a typical digital output configuration     Micus Alarm and Control System    161    Configuration       Digital Output Point Definition    Name   HPM FL  Pulse only  Address  E     Active    Text   TORONTO HPA A PRODUCED A FAULT    Color   LIGHT GREEN ON DARKGREEN v   Severity   MAJOR   si M Page  Inactive  Text   TORONTO HPA IS NORMAL      Color   DEFAULT MINOR vl  Severity   MINOR l V Page    Pulsed    Text     Color    DEFAULT WARNING S  Severity   WARNING 7 H    Save   Delete Quit      In this example  the Page check box for the active point state is checked  This means  that if an HPA M_FL alarm is detected  the system will activate the pager  and send a  TORONTO HPA A PRODUCED FAULT pager message to all users  configured to  receive this parti
92. al Port    The Modify Serial Port dialog box allows you to modify the configuration of a serial port  already configured and assigned to the pager  To modify serial port configuration   highlight its name in the Serial Port Selection dialog box  and click on the Modify push  button     The Modify Serial Port command uses the same Serial Port Configuration dialog box  as the Add Serial Port command     Micus Alarm and Control System 151    Configuration    7 4 5 3 Delete Serial Port    To delete a serial port from your pager configuration  highlight the serial port name in  the Serial Port Selection dialog box list  and click on the Delete push button     If the serial port you want to delete is used by some of your pager services  the  following dialog box will pop up        Serial Port Selection       This port is used by service BELL_MBL   You must change service configuration  before deleting the port                   You will have to assign another serial port to all affected services before the system  will allow you to delete this port  If there is no pager service assigned to this port  the  port will be deleted     7 4 6 Pager Event Reporting    During its operation your pager will generate a number of event reports  informing you  about page messages it sends and about problems encountered while trying to send  page messages  Typically  the pager is configured to send its event reports to the  event logger  which in turn forwards these reports to all other recipient
93. al personnel to avoid long distance calls from your central location  The Pager  Configuration utility will allow you to add more than a single pager to your system   When you run the utility  the list box on the left hand side will show all presently  configured pagers When you run the utility for the first time  the list box will be empty     144 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    and you will have to add your first pager to the system  Once your pager is configured   the Pager Configuration utility will allow you to view and to modify that configuration     The Pager Configuration utility main dialog box is depicted in the following picture           MACS Pager Configuration    Add Server  Delete Server  Event Reporting  Pager Services  Pager Queue  Serial Ports  View Server       PAGER    Exit                   The push buttons and their functions are     Configure Server    Add Server  Delete Server    Pager Services    Pager Queue  Serial Ports    Event Reporting  View Server    Exit    allows you to modify the configuration of an already configured  pager   allows you to add a new pager to your system configuration     allows you to delete an existing pager from your system configu   ration     allows you to configure the selected pager service providers   message recipients and other pager services     allows you to delete messages from the pager queue     allows you to configure one or more serial ports used by the  pager    allows you to specify comp
94. all individuals on the list     For example  you could define a list of personnel responsible for the equipment  alarms  another list of personnel responsible for the environment alarms  another for  security alarms  and another for fire alarms  When an event is reported  the pager  service sends pages only to those individuals responsible for a given alarm condition     You can configure your system to use more than one service provider  For example  if  your MACS system covers a large geographical area  you will have different service  providers in different cities  You could decide to use one pager service for the east  coast  and another for the west coast     The standard MACS pager system is implemented as a Windows XP service  and  uses the de facto standard Telocator Alphanumeric Input Protocol  TAP    f your local  paging company uses different protocol  you will need a custom built MACS pager  module     To process event reports  your MACS pager service must receive them from your  event logger  To learn how to configure your event logger to forward event reports to  the pager  please refer to the Event Logger Configuration description earlier in this  manual     To configure your pager  use the Pager Configuration utility program PagerCfg   Depending on the way your system is administered  this utility may or may not be  accessible from the MACS main GUI       To access the pager configuration utility from your workstation desktop  click on Start     gt  All Progra
95. all presently  configured MACS IO slots  The Slot Configuration dialog box contains the following  push buttons     Configure Slot allows you to modify an existing slot configuration    Add Slot allows you to add a new slot to the unit configuration in the data   base    Delete Slot allows you to delete an existing slot from the unit configuration in    the database     Configure Points allows you to add a points configuration to the slot selected from  the list of slots     Exit closes the Slot Configuration dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 197    Configuration    7 6 6 1 Add Slot    When you add a new MACS IO module to the configuration database  all slots for that  module are marked as empty  You have to add at least one slot to a MACS IO module  to make it usable  You can also add new slots to an existing module at a later date  for  example to increase the number of alarm points that the module can monitor     To add a slot to the selected module  open the Slot Configuration dialog box and click  on the Add Slot push button  The Add Slot dialog box has the following layout     Name  Module    Slot number    Adapter number       Add Slot    Name     Module   PCLDIOS2EM v     Slot number  e    Adapter number  fo                         edit box allows you to enter a 15 character long name for the slot     pull down list allows you to select the type of the MACS IO plug in  board installed in the selected slot  Individual MACS IO boards  and their respective co
96. ap image names and file  paths  open the Manage Bitmaps dialog box and click on the View Bitmaps push  button  The system will create a report and present it on the screen using the  WordPad text editor  From within the editor  you can save the report into a text file   print it  search for keywords  cut and paste  and perform other functions typical of the  WordPad  A typical report layout is depicted in the following figure       Bitmaps   Notepad  File Edit Format View Help    Bitmap name  Open Fridge  Set ID  1  Bitmap file  c   MACS Config OpenFridge  bmp    Bitmap name  Closed Fridge  set ID  2  Bitmap file  c   MACS Config closedFridge  bmp    Bitmap name  Green Light  Set ID  3  Bitmap S c   macs  Contig Greenlight  bmp    Bitmap S Red Light  Set ID  4  Bitmap   c   mMacs  Contfig Redlight  bmp    Bitmap   Amber Light  Set ID  5  Bitmap   c   MACS Config AmberLight  bmp       Bitmap d Big Amber Light  Set ID  6  Bitmap   C   MaAcs  Contig Bi gAmberLi ght  bmp       Big Red Light  ri  C   MACS Config BigRedLight  bmp    Big Green Light  s          258 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 8 3 Selecting Bitmaps    To present a digital input or digital output point using bitmap images  you have to  select which bitmap to use for the active point state and which one to use for the  inactive point state  Similarly  for an analog input or output  you have to select which  bitmap to use for the analog value within limits  which one to use for the val
97. aps from the pull down lists  you will see their previews in the adjacent  boxes  and the associated fully qualified file names in the read only boxes below the  pull down lists     The Select Current Bitmaps dialog box has the following layout     Active Above Bitmap    pull down list allows you to select a bitmap image to represent  the active state for a digital point  or a value above the upper  threshold for an analog point     Inactive Within Bitmap    pull down list allows you to select a bitmap image to represent  the inactive state for a digital point  or a value within limits for an  analog point     260 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Pulsed Below Bitmap    pull down list allows you to select a bitmap image to represent a  value below the lower threshold for an analog point  The digital  output pulsed state is a transient state and as such it is not shown  in the graphical screens  Selecting a bitmap for a pulsed state has  no effect on the custom screen display     OK push button makes the selected bitmaps current  and closes the  dialog box   Cancel push button closes the dialog box without selecting the bitmaps     8 9 Using Enumerated Points    In many cases  analog input and output points values belong to a known set of  discrete values  and each value represent a distinct point state  For example  if a point  represents a TV channel  its value will be one of the channel numbers  If a point repre   sents a serial port data rate  it
98. ardware vendors     To add action push buttons to your custom screens  you have to   e Create a list of actions used by the system   e Link the actions with the points     e Position the actions in your custom screen     8 10 1 Managing Actions    Adding actions in your custom screens is a two step process  First  you need to add  them to the list of actions known to the system  You can always add actions  modify  their names and associated commands  and delete them from the list  Next  you  include them into your custom screens     You will manage actions from the Display Editor  using the Manage Actions dialog box   To open it  click on the Bitmaps   gt  Manage Actions in the editor main menu             MACS Display Editor Version 3 0 BAX       Fie View Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help       The Manage Actions dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the  following layout     Micus Alarm and Control System 271    Creating Custom Screens       Manage Actions    PRE es  PREVIEW SWITCH   TELNET     User s Manual Add Action             Exit                   On the left hand side  the dialog box shows a scrollable list of all presently configured  actions  Note that the list contains symbolic names assigned to your actions  rather  than the exact commands  You will associate action names with the commands  through the configuration process  The rest of the dialog box consists of  the following  push buttons    Configure Action allows you to modify an existi
99. arm sound    D  MACS Config SoundMinor way    Warning sound     On line User s Manual    C  Program Files Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Reader AcroRd32  D  MACS Config MACS User s Manual  pdf     Cancel                         Micus Alarm and Control System 219    Configuration    This dialog box consists of the following     Critical alarm sound edit box allows you to enter a fully qualified path to the wave file  that you want to play when a critical alarm is reported to your  GUI     Major alarm sound edit box allows you to enter a fully qualified path to the wave file  that you want to play when a major alarm is reported to your GUI     Minor alarm sound edit box allows you to enter a fully qualified path to the wave file  that you want to play when a minor alarm is reported to your GUI     Warning sound edit box allows you to enter a fully qualified path to the wave file  that you want to play when a warning is reported to your GUI     On line User   s Manual    edit box allows you to enter a command line to execute to open  the on line user   s manual  Usually  this is done using the Adobe  Acrobat Reader  Note that the file names that include spaces  must be enclosed in double quotes  as shown in the figure above     OK push button saves your options settings into the machine Regis   try and closes the dialog box    Cancel push button closes the dialog box without saving the options set   tings     Note that you do not have to specify sounds for all severity levels  For example  i
100. artup to  query its configuration from the database  If there is a mismatch  in names  the service will not find its configuration and will not  start properly        1  In this section we refer to MACS IO services and MACS IO modules interchangeably  A MACS IO service is a  software component  It is a Windows XP service that runs on the MACS server  A MACS IO module encom   passes both the service and the associated computer hardware     192 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Computer name edit box allows you to specify the name of the computer in which  your MACS IO module is installed  This name is used  in conjunc   tion with the protocol port  by other computers and programs on  your network to establish a TCP IP connection with the MACS IO  module     Protocol port edit box allows you to specify the TCP IP protocol port your  MACS IO module will listen to service requests from other com   puters and programs on your TCP IP network     Text Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your MACS IO module will  maintain its own text event log  This box is normally unchecked   which means that the module will not create and maintain its own  set of daily created event log text files  Usually  the module is con   figured to report its events to the event logger     Text log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  which will contain the pager event log text files  If you want your  pager to maintain its own event log  yo
101. ase  MAPI interface configuration  changes take effect on the first subsequent MAPI interface program startup   Therefore  after making changes in your MAPI configuration  make sure to restart the  corresponding MAPI interface program     To change configuration of an existing MAPI interface  highlight the interface name in  the list  and click the Configure Server push button in the MAPI Configuration utility  main dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 175    Configuration    The Modify Server Configuration dialog box has the same layout as the New Server  Configuration dialog box  described on the previous pages     7 5 3 Delete MAPI Interface    To delete an existing MAPI interface configuration  highlight the name of the interface  you want to delete  and click on the Delete Server push button in the MAPI Configu   ration utility main dialog box     The following dialog box will pop up        MACS MAPI Configuration       This server may be used For your event monitoring     re you sure you want to delete it              To delete the selected MAPI interface  click on the Yes push button  To exit the dialog  box without deleting the interface  click on the No push button     7 5 4 View MAPI Interface    To view your MAPI interface configuration  select the interface name in the MAPI  Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the View Server push button  The  system will create a configuration report and present it using the WordPad text editor   From wit
102. at contains  bitmap drawings used for your custom screens  The path you  specify might point to a local disk drive  or to a shared network  drive     MACS Root Path edit box allows you to enter the path to the root folder that con   tains MACS sub folders  The path you specify might point to a  local disk drive  or to a shared network drive     Save push button allows you to add your new MACS node to the con   figuration database and close the dialog box     Exit push button allows you to exit the dialog box without adding the  new MACS node     7 3 5 2 Modify MACS Node    The modify an existing MACS Node configuration use the Configure Node command   Open the MACS Node Selection dialog box  highlight the node that you want to  modify and click the Configure Node push button  The Edit MACS Node Configuration  dialog box will pop up on the screen     The Edit MACS Node Configuration dialog box has the same layout as the New  MACS Node Configuration dialog box     140 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 3 5 3 Delete MACS Node    To delete an existing MACS node from the configuration database  open the MACS  Node Selection dialog box  highlight the node in the scrollable list  and click on the  Delete Node push button  The following dialog box will pop up     MACS Node Selection Ka       This MACS node may be used by your system   Are you sure you want to delete it                    To delete the selected MACS node click on the Yes push button  To exit the dial
103. ate image names with the file names  through the configuration process  The rest of the dialog box consists of the following  push buttons     Configure Bitmap push button allows you to modify an existing image name and file    location    Add Bitmap allows you to add a new bitmap image to your system configura   tion    Delete Bitmap allows you to delete an existing bitmap image from your system    configuration     View Bitmaps allows you to create and view a text report that contains a list of  all configured bitmap images     Exit closes the Manage Bitmaps dialog box     8 8 2 1 Add Bitmap    To add a new bitmap image to your system configuration  open the Manage Bitmaps  dialog box and click on the Add Bitmap push button  The Edit Bitmap dialog box will  pop up on the screen        Edit Bitmap       ID  3  Name   Green Light  File   C  MACS Config GreenLight bmp                      The Edit Bitmap dialog box consists of the following   ID read only field contains the bitmap image database identifier     Name edit box allows you to specify the name for the image  The name  can be up to 15 characters long  and does not have to be the    256 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    same as the file name  Typically  you will use a descriptive name  that indicates the condition the image illustrates  e g  Hydro Fail   ure      File edit box allows you to enter a fully qualified path of the file that  contains the image  You have to specify drive letter an
104. ators  Others prefer to make  configuration programs accessible from the MACS main user interface  The choice is yours  and the way you  access configuration utilities is a field configurable option        118 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    If your system is configured to provide access to the configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI     you can also start the event logger configuration utility by selecting  configuration utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu or by  clicking the Configuration button on the toolbar      i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 L  ok    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager   Event Log   Mie Archive Configuration Help    See pl es A SIE     Select Configuration Utility              The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities              Color Definitions  Demo Server Configuration   Display Editor   DSA 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration    File Copy Configuration   Gl Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration   IPG Quality Control Configuration   Liebert RCM8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration   MPEG Monitor Confiquration m    Cancel                     Select Event Log Configuration and click on the Open push button  or simply double   click on the Event Log Configuration name  The main Even
105. cal Histogram           000  c cee 284  8 11 5 Modifying Points       0    cece eee eee eee 286  8 11 6 Deleting Points        0 00  e cc ene eee eee 286  8 11 7 Nested Custom Screens        2    c cece eee eee 287  8 12 Invoking Custom Screens          00  eee ceteris 291  8 1231 Dynamic Testing i se Nd da cette ENEE NEIE ae ENNER Ea 292    Micus Alarm and Control System vii    Table of Contents    viii Micus Alarm and Control System    Revision History    1 Revision History                            Revision   Date Comments Author  1 0 December 27  2000   First Document Release Michael Bankovitch  3 0 January 22  2004 Software Revision 3 Michael Bankovitch  Windows XP OS  3 8 September 15  2005   Switching databases Michael Bankovitch  added  Trademarks  Windows  Windows XP  Windows 2000  Windows NT  Microsoft     MS  Access and Outlook Express are trademarks of Microsoft  Inc  Oracle is a trademark of Oracle Corporation     Acknowledgement  Realization of this manual by Tina Bankovic     Copyright Notice     The entire contents of this manual are copyright    by Micus Real Time Software    Inc  All rights reserved  The contents of this manual are subject to change without  notice        Micus Alarm and Control System 1    Revision History    Micus Alarm and Control System    Reference Documents    2 Reference Documents    1 Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS  Installation Procedure  Revision 3 0   January 22  2004  Michael Bankovitch     2 Micus Alarm and Control System
106. cation in the custom screen where you want to position the top left corner of your  point  Press the right button and drag the mouse to create a square which represents  your point location  As you drag the mouse  the coordinates and size of your point  rectangle will show up in the Point Attributes  In the case of a baseball switch display  style  the width and the height must be the same  Typically  you will draw an approx   imate square on the screen  and then manually adjust its coordinates and size     282 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Point Attributes    x 1540 Y  503 H  130 W  20    Options   TOP ACTIVE LEFT    Max   0 00    Name  e   Min    0 00    Next  you need to define the active and inactive position and rotation of your baseball  switch  To do so  click on the Options pull down list and select the appropriate option     Point Attributes    x   540 de  503 H   30 W  20    Options    TOP ACTIVE LEFT si Max    0 00    _  TOP ACTIVE LEFT in  000  Name   TOP ACTIVE RIGHT    To add your baseball switch to your custom screen  click on the Add push button  To  save it in the database  click on the Save push button     Assume that the background of your custom screen contained a schematic like this        Baseball Switch    With the careful positioning on the screen  your newly added baseball switch will look  somewhat like this        Baseball Switch    Micus Alarm and Control System 283    Creating Custom Screens    8 11 4 Analog Point Ve
107. ce will listen to service requests from other computers and  programs on your TCP IP network     Text Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your MAPI interface pro   gram will maintain its own text event log  This box is normally  unchecked  which means that the program will not create and  maintain its own set of daily created event log text files  Usually   the MAPI interface is configured to report its events to the event  logger     Text log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  that will contain the MAPI interface event log text files  If you want  your MAPI interface to maintain its own event log  you must spec   ify a folder that differs from the event log maintained by the event  logger     Binary Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your MAPI interface will  maintain its own binary event log  This box is normally  unchecked  which means that the MAPI interface will not create  and maintain its own set of daily created event log binary files     Binary log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  that will contain the MAPI interface specific event log binary files     For instructions on how to specify the path for the MAPI interface specific event log   please refer to the chapter on Event Logger Configuration     7 5 2 Modify MAPI Interface    To modify an existing MAPI interface configuration use the Modify Server Configu   ration command  In the current MACS software rele
108. ce you assign slots to your MACS IO module  you have to configure the input   output and analog points that you want to use  Various MACS IO plug in boards  provide different combinations of inputs  outputs and relays  Each supported board is  presented in more detail on the following pages     7 6 7 1 PCl DIO8 Board Configuration    The PCI DIO8 board consists of 8 digital inputs and 8 relays  When you select a PCI   DIO8 slot in the Slot Configuration dialog box and click on the Configure Points push  button  the 8 Point Slot Configuration dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog  box has the following layout     8 Point Slot Configuration    Name   PCI DIO8  Address  H       Er Jm ox 1  am   jac    HI HI  A A  SI SI  DI HI  mal HI  aimg gi fours                   Micus Alarm and Control System 201    Configuration    At the top of the dialog box you will see the slot name and number  shown as read   only boxes  To change the slot name or number  use the Configure Slot command   The rest of the 8 Point Slot Configuration dialog box is divided into two groups  The  left hand group  designated as  nputs  allows you to add or to modify the input points  configuration  The right hand group  marked Outputs  allows you to configure output    relays     To add an input or output point  or to modify an existing point configuration  click on  the push button associated with the point  Dialog boxes used to configure points are  described later in this document     Name  Addr
109. change the list by adding  new messages or deleting already assigned messages  To delete a message from the  selected user list  highlight the message in the MAPI messages assigned to this user  list and click on the Delete push button     In each list  MAPI events are presented using the server  unit  slot and point name  If  you want to see the text messages assigned to a given event  highlight the corre   sponding event in either top or bottom list  and click on the corresponding Details push  button  The MAPI Event Details dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog box  layout is presented on the following pages     MAPI Messages Assigned to this User    scrollable list box contains allMAPI messages assigned to the  selected user     All Pager Events   scrollable list box contains allsystem wide defined MAPI events     Server column in the list contains the name of the Windows NT service  from which the message originates     Unit column in the list contains the name of the equipment unit from  which the message originates     Slot column in the list contains the name of the slot within the equip   ment from which the message originates  Many communication  equipment devices have slots  which are used to install equip   ment plug in modules  Equipment that does not have slots is con   sidered single slot equipment  meaning that all components are  located within a single  monolithic unit     Point column in the list contains the name of the point from which the  me
110. ck on the Services icon         New Office Document    j    W    V    Open Office Document    Programs       EL    x   gt          Documents  gt             J Control Panel  Printers     Taskbar       Settings d       tt    amp     Windows NT Workstation    Shut Down           gie  1 40 PM    In the Windows NT Services manager  highlight the MACS equipment module you    want to start  and click on the Start push button     Services    Status Startup    Service                  MACS Demo Server Manual    MACS Event Logger Manual  MACS GI DSR 4800 Server Manual  MACS GI Encoder Server Manual  MACS IBS Server Manual  MACS Motorola Nucleus Il Server Manual    MACS MPEG Server Manual       MACS Pager Manual   MACS Site Sentry Server Manual Stagtup   MACS Switch Server Manual   sl    Hw Profiles      Startup Parameters      Help    Micus Alarm and Control System        x          Close    Start    Stop    ul    Hause    Eontinde       43    Getting Started    While starting the service  Windows NT displays the following message box     Service Control EN    CO  Attempting to Start the MACS MPEG Server service on  ICIUS       Once the service is started  the message box will disappear  Note that in the above  example message box   C US is the name of the computer  This name will be  replaced with the name of your own workstation     5 1 2 MACS GUI Startup    You can start your MACS GUI in several ways     e Double click on the MacsMenu exe icon in the  WACS Programs directory depict
111. configure serial  ports to use to communicate with the equipment     When using the optional pager  e mail or fax system  you need to define a list of  pager  e mail or fax users  and to assign a list of events for each user on the list   Similarly  the optional trouble ticketing system requires additional configuration for the  list of trouble tickets  repair procedures  technicians  etc     Although the configuration database contains many parameters  most of them are  hidden from the operators who use MACS utilities to configure the system  Most of the  parameters are set automatically and you must enter only those parameters where the  system allows choices     Micus Alarm and Control System 25    Overview    4 6 Event Log Management    Each event report received from the equipment is stored into a log file  This feature  allows static analysis of the recorded alarm conditions  The system automatically  creates and maintains log files on a daily basis  Since all event reports are stored into  the files  the simplest way of analyzing events is to view the log files  While viewing  any given file  the operator can search for specific keywords or text strings  such as  time stamps or equipment names   In addition  the operator can selectively print  relevant sections of the file  or the entire file     Typically  the system maintains only a single event log  managed by the Event  Logger  a service specifically designed to handle the event log  The equipment  modules are then
112. ctive or pulsed  Analog inputs can be within limits  above upper threshold  or below  lower threshold  Analog outputs can be set to any value within the range appropriate  for the associated equipment parameter     Summary points reflect any change in the equipment status  In addition  they handle  communication alarms  which are generated when the communication with the  equipment or server is lost     All of the configurable parameters are defined by the end user through the system  configuration process     4 3 Status And Alarm Processing    MACS detects status changes and alarm conditions in two ways  by passively  monitoring the equipment  or by actively polling the equipment status  Unsolicited  messages from the equipment or responses to the polls are then translated into the  user defined status and alarm messages     Typically  several operators simultaneously use their GUIs on the local or wide area    network  Status messages and or alarms received from the equipment are reported to  all GUIs  They provide extensive buffering capability  thus allowing operators to browse    Micus Alarm and Control System 17    Overview    through several pages of collected records     When displaying event reports on the screen  the client typically uses a subset of the  information actually available in the event report  This subset consists of the date   time  unit name  point name and message text  The rest of the information is used  internally by the system  but it remains ava
113. cular message  You can assign any given message to any number of  users  When the corresponding alarm or status condition occurs  the system will send  a page to all users configured to receive this message    To specify which event reports to send as pager messages to a given user  highlight  the user name in the list box in the Pager Users dialog box and click on the Pager  Messages push button    The Pager Messages dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box will  indicate the name of the selected user on the caption bar  The dialog box layout is  depicted in the following picture                       162 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration           Pager Messages For Michael Bankovitch X    Pager messages assigned to this user     Server  Unit  Slot  Point         COMMUNICATION Za       DSA A0 LESLARD  nn ety MUNICATION    IBS IBS COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 1 COMMUNICATION  Image Video NEW PANEL COMMUNICATION  MACS DEMO DEMO_2 INPUTS AIR CONDITIONER      uan mmm mem n memea mirunan    Details Delete Add  __Detais   Die      All pager events     Server  Unit  Slot  Point           COMSTREAM MICUS COMMUNICATION aA  DSR 4800 TEST IRD COMMUNICATION    GI Encoder YSE Unit COMMUNICATION     IBS IBS COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 1 COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 2 COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 3 COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 4 COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 5 COMMUNICATION  Image Video CHANNEL 5 COMMUNICATION  Image Video NEW 
114. d folder  names  e g  C  IMACS Config HydroActive bmp  or fully qualified  network path  if the file resides on another computer  e g    I TOR   ONTO MACS Config HydroActive bmp      Save push button saves the bitmap image configuration and closes the  dialog box   Cancel push button closes the dialog box without saving the bitmap    image configuration     8 8 2 2 Configure Bitmap    Once you add a bitmap image to your system configuration  you can rename it  or you  can change the file name and location using the Configure Bitmap command  To  modify an existing image configuration  open the Manage Bitmaps dialog box and click  on the Configure Bitmap push button  The Edit Bitmap dialog box will pop up on the  screen  The layout and operation of this dialog box is the same as described in the  Add Bitmap section     8 8 2 3 Delete Bitmap    To delete an existing bitmap image from your system configuration  open the Manage  Bitmaps dialog box  highlight the name of the bitmap that you want to delete  and click  on the Delete Bitmap push button  The following message box will pop up on the  screen        Manage Bitmaps       Pi   re you sure you want to delete this bitmap              To delete the selected bitmap click on the Yes push button  To close the message box  without deleting the bitmap click on the No push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 257    Creating Custom Screens    8 8 2 4 View Bitmaps    To create a report that contains a list of all configured bitm
115. dd push button allows you to add a new color definition to your con   figuration database    Delete push button allows you to delete an existing color definition    View push button allows you to view a list of all color definitions    Preview Box shows you the selected color definition foreground and back     ground color and blinking   Exit push button exits the ColorCfg configuration utility     7 1 2 Color Selection    You need to define a foreground color and a background color either when adding a  new color definition  or when modifying an existing color definition  To modify an  existing color definition  select the color name and click on the Modify push button  To  add a new color  click on the Add push button     110 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Foreground Color    Basic colors          WI WEE   EE Weg Im  Custom colors     BEE EEE ee    Hue   40 Red   255  BE EE Sees Giese OE    peme Custom Wolors ColorlSolid Lum  AEN  Blue  jo  Cancel Add to Custom Colors          When defining or modifying the foreground and background colors  the program  displays a standard Windows dialog box  used to select colors  If you intend to use  your color definition for graphics only  you can select any color that you want  If you  are creating a color definition to be used for text messages  you must select a solid  color  because Windows accepts only solid colors when displaying text     7 1 3 Color Descriptions    Each color that you define has a description 
116. dows NT service setup  open the Windows NT  Service Manager from the Control Panel  Highlight the MACS Event Logger service  and click on the Startup button  You will see your Event Logger service configuration  as depicted in the following picture     Services    x               Service Status Startup  MACS Demo Server Manual a    MACS Event Logger Automatic  MACS GI DSR 4800 Savion  MACS GI Encoder      MACS Motorola Nuc Service  MACS Event Logger  MACS MPEG Serve  MACS Pager   MACS Pylon Server  MACS Site Sentry S  MACS Switch Serve                 Disabled          Startup Parameters  l      System Account    IV Allow Service to Interact with Desktop      C This Account    H  Basswood       ES       oss     To configure your Event Logger for the multiuser environment  change the Log On As  data to another account  such as MACS  and make this account a member of the  Administrators group     126 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Service Status Startup Close  MACS Demo Server Manual a  MACS Event Logger Automatic  MACS GI DSR 480  MACS GI Encoder       MACS Motorola Nuc Service  MACS Event Logger    MACS MPEG Serve BW 5  MACS Pager tartup Type    MACS Pylon Server     Automatic  MACS Site Sentry S   CC  Manual  MACS Switch Serve  Disabled        Start        Service  Stop         onthe    Cancel Startup       9  MA    Help Hw Profiles       Startup Parameters            Log On As      System Account   T Allow Service to Interact with Desktop     This Accoun
117. e     push button closes the 16 Point Slot Configuration dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 6 8 Status and Control Points Definition    As you add your MACS IO module to the MACS server configuration  you will install  and configure plug in boards to one or more slots in the MACS server chassis  The  plug in boards provide several combinations of digital input and output points     Although similar  definitions for the digital input points and digital output points differ  slightly  Dialog boxes used to configure each of these categories are presented on the  following pages     7 6 8 1 Digital Input Point Definition    Digital input points are typically used to monitor contact closures on the equipment or  external sensors attached to the MACS server  These points have two states  active  and inactive  Each time MACS IO module detects an input point state transition  it  reports it to the MACS server  To present point state transition to the operators  MACS  displays a text message in all active GUIs  and updates all active windows that contain  that point     MACS IO Digital Input Point Definition dialog box has the following layout        Digital Input Point Definition    Name  JIN 2  Address  H    Active    Text  ACTIVE  Color   YELLOW ON BRIGHT RED v  Severity   CRITICAL v V Page    Inactive    Text   INACTIVE  Color   YELLOW ON GREEN A  Severity   WARNING v    Page    Save Delete                         Micus Alarm and Control System 207
118. e  following figure depicts possible client connections to a server  which could be either a  regional or a master server  The figure illustrates a variety of possible physical  connections  LAN connections  RAS connections via modems or ISDN  and WAN  connections  Clients can connect to a MACS server over any physical network  as  long as the TCP IP connectivity is available     Client Workstations       TCP IP    Client Workstations    Multiple MACS servers can be configured to share a common database  or to use  their own databases  When more than one database is used  the clients can dynami   cally disconnect from one database and connect to another     32 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 15 3 Equipment Connections to Servers    MACS servers support a variety of connections to the equipment  The type of  connection depends on the equipment itself  and on the site location with respect to  the MACS server  Some equipment can be accessed over the Ethernet  using TCP IP  connections  However  devices such as Remote Telemetry Units  RTUs  are typically  accessed over serial lines  using either direct connections or dial up lines  In addition   environment sensors and contact closures may be monitored using built in opto  isolated inputs  while external devices can be controlled using built in relays     Usually  MACS servers are equipped with multi port plug in boards  which offer  RS232  RS422 or RS485 electrical interface     MACS equipment modules are design
119. e Select push button   The Equipment Selection window  depicted in the following picture  will pop up              Equipment Selection LS  Equipment Type  Unit Name   COMSTREAM NTO  IV CTRL PANEL been  IV MONITOR MONTREAL  NUCLEUS II  RMS   SENTRY  Cancel                     62 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    To select the equipment  use the Equipment Selection window as follows     Equipment Type list box contains a list of all equipment types that support the com   mand line mode of operation  To select the equipment type  click  on the appropriate name in the list  When you select the equip   ment  the system will display a list of all units of the selected  equipment type in the Unit Name list     Unit Name list box contains a list of all units of the selected equipment type   The list changes as you select different equipment types from the  Equipment Type list     Select push button selects the equipment unit  The Equipment Selection  window is removed from the screen and the selected unit is  handed over to the Command Line window     Once you select the equipment  you are ready to begin your session with the selected  unit  At this point  the system will lock the selected unit for you  You will be the only  operator who can operate this unit until you close the Command Line window  or until  you select another unit  In addition  if the unit is on a dial up line  the system will dial  out and connect to the unit     You start your conversation with the un
120. e Shado    Net Logon          Bs NetMeeting Remote    Sp  Ribak    onl  Temm o ebien zs     I Di    Extended A Standard  Stop service MACS Event Logger on Local Computer                     Description Status   kad  Provides n    Started  Manages I    Started  Provides in     Detects an    Started        Configures         Resume  Restart  All Tasks  gt  d  EE Wl  Refresh EI  Properties       Help    While stopping the service  Windows XP displays the following message box     MACS Event Logger                 Swett      Windows is attempting to stop the following service on Local Computer             Micus Alarm and Control System    47    Getting Started  5 2 1 2 Windows NT    To stop any of the MACS services  login to your MACS server  open the Windows NT  Services manager by clicking on Start   gt  Settings   gt  Control Panel  When you open  the Control Panel  double click on the Services icon               Service Status Startup  MACS Event Logger Started Manual Start    MACS GI DSA 4800 Server Manual  MACS GI Encoder Server Manual H Stop    MACS IBS Server Manual  MACS Motorola Nucleus Il Server Manual Dee   MACS MPEG Server Manual SE    MACS Pager Manual       MACS Site Sentry Server Manual Startup    MACS Switch Server Manual   sl    Hw Profiles     Startup Parameters     PO Help       Once in the Services manager  highlight the service you want to stop  and click on the  Stop push button     While stopping the service  Windows XP displays the following message box  
121. e and number  shown as read   only boxes  To change the slot name or address  use the Configure Slot command   The rest of the 32 Output Point Slot Configuration dialog box contains a list of output  relays  that allows you to add or to modify the output points configuration     To add an output point  or to modify an existing point configuration  click on the push  button associated with the point  Dialog boxes used to configure points are described  later in this document     The dialog box consists of the following elements     Name read only box contains the slot name   Address read only box contains the slot number   Outputs group of controls shows 32 relays  Relays that are actually used    are indicated by their respective names  To add a new relay   select an unused output point and click on the adjacent push but   ton  To modify an existing output point configuration  click on the  push button next to the point name     Exit push button closes the 32 Output Point Slot Configuration dialog  box     204 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 6 7 3 PCI 32REL Board Configuration    The PCI 32REL board consists of 32 relays  When you select a PCI 32REL slot in the  Slot Configuration dialog box and click on the Configure Points push button  the 8  Point Slot Configuration dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog box has the  following layout     16 Point Slot Configuration xX     Name   PCI DIO32EM  Address   2          Outputs                      
122. e configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI H  you can also start the pager configuration utility by selecting       9  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained later in this document  in Access To Config     uration Utilities     Micus Alarm and Control System    143    Configuration    configuration utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu or by  clicking the Configuration button on the toolbar     D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX          Select Configuration Utility    The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities           Image Video Monitor Configuration  IPG Quality Control Configuration  Liebert RCM8 Configuration  MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration   MPEG Monitor Configuration      Nucleus I  Configuration   Pager Configuration   Ping Service Configuration    Site Sentry Configuration    SNMP Manager Configuration    ST60 Configuration   Test Client    Trouble Ticketina Confiauration v     Cancel                     Select Pager Configuration and click on the Open push button  or simply double click  on the Pager Configuration name  The main Pager Configuration dialog box will pop  up on the screen     MACS can be configured to use more than one pager Windows XP service  For  example  if you have regional MACS servers  you could use these servers to page  loc
123. e eee eee 40  5 1 1 1 Windows KP  41  5 1 1 2  Windows NT aceite cee dee we NNN ee ee EN ee EE RR 43   5 1 2 MACS GUI Startup     0    0  eee eee 44   5 2 MACS Shutdown  sirs os det eaters he eis eee NA du 46   5 2 1 MACS Services Shutdown      46  5 2 1 1 WindOWS XP    1  ec eee eee 46  5 2 1 2 Windows NT    0    cece eee eee 48   5 2 2 MACS GUI Shutdown  NEEN EINEN NENNEN eee NEIER SS tee es 48   5 3 Elements of the Main MACS Wmdow cece eee eens 49  5 3 1 Toolbar ICONS      eens 50  5 3 2 Event Report Format    52   5 4 Commands ENEE 52   6 ET EE   6 1 Connecting to MACS   000 c cece eee eee 56  6 1 1 Connect Commande 56  6 1 2 Disconnect Commande 57  6 1 3 Select MACS Node    1    0    cece eee eee 58   6 2 MOnIOMs eredero nagaan ra SA n eee taeee setae eee ten tence 60  6 2 1 Command Line Window         0    cece eee eee 60  6 2 2 Status Monitors       00 0  ccc eee eee 65    i Micus Alarm and Control System    Table of Contents    6 2 3 Equipment Specific Monitors           00  cece eee 67  6 2 4 MACS IO Monitor    70  6 2 4 1 Slot With 8 Inputs and 8 Outputs         2    cee eee 73   6 2 4 2 Slot With 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs     0    cece eee 75   6 2 4 3 Slot With 32 Outputs        0    cee eee 76   6 3 Equipment Locking            0  20 e cece eee eee 77  6 3 1 Lock Command NEEN eae ee ea ee ee eee 77   GB Ch    Gee ee eee ee 79  6 4 1 Send Pager Message    79   6 5 Event Log  2s  sec ccc cee AEN NEEN SEENEN eee see eee ee eee 80  6 5 1 View Event Log  1    0  cece e
124. e equipment  If you lock the equipment  MACS will keep  the telephone line open as long as the equipment is locked  It will therefore execute  your sequence of commands much faster than when dialing out to execute each  individual command separately     6 3 1 Lock Command    Equipment locking is done using the Equipment Lock command  To enter the Equip   ment Lock command  click Equipment Locking pull down menu and select Lock menu  item        Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Me Archive Configuration Help    alal a ml all el 2          Micus Alarm and Control System 77    Commands    Alternatively  click on the corresponding toolbar icon depicted in the picture below     Al Equipment locking    The Equipment Locking dialog box has the following layout        r     Equipment Lock X           NAVCANADA A   ELECTRALERT    SECOND   SSP4 TORONTO   ST60 CONTROLLER   T11 MAC102   Tandberg   TEST IRD   TORONTO 552 v    Lock Unlock  Exit    The dialog box shows two lists  The list on the left hand side contains the names of all  equipment units which are not locked by your GUI  The list on the right hand side  contains a list of all equipment units which are presently locked by your GUI                    To lock a piece of equipment  highlight the name of the unit in the list of unlocked  units and click the Lock push button  To unlock a unit  select its name from the list of  locked units and click on the Unlock pu
125. e in Montreal  you will add a list of your Vancouver based technicians to  the first service  and a list of Montreal personnel to the second service     To add individual users to your pager configuration  you need to     e Add user name and pager ID      Define a list of possible pager messages   for that user    To manage your pager users  you will use the Pager Users dialog box  To open it   select a pager service in the Pager Service Selection dialog box  and click on the  Pager Users push button     The Pager Users dialog box has the following layout        SI    Pager Users    Michael Bankovitch 637709 Pager Messages  Add User  View User          User Data    Name  Michael Bankovitch  Pager ID   637709    Exit                      12  When configuring your pager  you have to define a list of all possible event reports that might be sent to the user  as pager messages  Any given message from the list will be sent to the user only if and when the corresponding  event happens     Micus Alarm and Control System 159    Configuration    Pager Messages    Add User    Name  Pager ID    Delete User    View User    160    push button allows you to define a list of messages for a given  pager user  To define user messages  select a user by highlight   ing his or her name in the list box  and click on the Pager Mes   sages push button     push button allows you to add new users to the list  To add a new  user  fill in the Name and Pager ID fields and then click on the  Add User pus
126. e screens  and MACS  display editor     One or more network adapters  depending on the network topology and on the  available TCP IP network connectivity     A number of serial ports  depending on the exact requirements for each regional  server     A number of either internal or external high speed modems  depending on the  exact requirements for each regional server     Windows XP Professional  Windows 2000 or Windows NT Workstation 4 0  operating system     MS Access ODBC driver  Oracle client software and ODBC driver  or MySQL  client software and ODBC driver     MS Access  Oracle or MySQL database     Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started    5 Getting Started    This section shows you how to start and stop your MACS server and your graphical  user interface  GUI   and introduces the main GUI functions used in day to day system  operation     Your GUI can run on Windows XP  Windows 2000 or Windows NT workstations  This  is why in this manual we show sample screens using interchangeably either Windows  XP or Windows Classic appearance  Both sets of screens are shown only where tasks  are performed differently in Windows XP than in other environments  An example of  that is starting and stopping your system     All MACS programs that run on your workstation are located in a dedicated directory   similar to the one depicted in the following picture                                                                                      BX Exploring   programs Bisi Xx
127. e spaces  enclose the entire file  name in double quotes  We suggest that you try your commands  from the Windows Command Prompt first  and then use the same  command line for your action     push button saves the action into the database and closes the  dialog box     push button closes the dialog box without saving the action     Micus Alarm and Control System 273    Creating Custom Screens    8 10 1 2 Configure Action    Once you add an action to your system configuration  you can rename it  or you can  change the command line using the Configure Action command  To modify the  existing action configuration  open the Manage Actions dialog box and click on  Configure Action push button  The Edit Action dialog box will pop up on the screen   The layout and operation of this dialog box is the same as for the Add Action  command     8 10 1 3 Delete Action    To delete an existing action from your system configuration  open the Manage Actions  dialog box  highlight the name of the action that you want to delete  and click on the  Delete Action push button  The following message box will pop up on the screen        Manage Actions       Pi   re you sure you want to delete this action              To delete the selected action click on the Yes push button  To close the message box  without deleting the action click on the No push button     8 10 1 4 View Actions    To create a report that contains a list of all configured action names and command  lines  open the Manage Actions dia
128. e status bar appears on the screen  or not     Copy Event Log allows you to archive the event log files into another folder or net   work drive   Copy Equipment Log    Delete Event Log    allows you to archive the equipment log files into another folder or  network drive     allows you to delete the selected event log files     Micus Alarm and Control System 53    Getting Started    Delete Equipment Log    Select Utility    Options    About MACS  User   s Manual    54    is a command that allows you to delete the selected equipment  log files     allows you to open a list of all configured MACS utilities and to  launch the selected utility from the main user interface program     allows you to select sounds to play on your workstation for differ   ent alarm severity levels  and to setup your on line User   s Man   ual     displays the MacsMenu program About dialog box   displays on line MACS User    s Manual  this book      Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 Commands    This chapter presents in detail commands available through the MACS graphical user  interface  You can access any command using the pull down menus  In addition  fre   quently used commands have icons in the toolbar  You can invoke these commands  simply by clicking the appropriate push button     The commands are arranged in the following pull down menus     File    Monitor    Equipment Locking  Pager   Event Log   View   Archive  Configuration    Help    menu contains a standard Windows pull dow
129. e the  ticket is open  you can select the appropriate repair procedure from a predefined list  and assign a technician responsible for the repair  The technician can enter his com   ments related to the repair and  upon completing the task  close the ticket     You can view and print individual tickets  a list of open tickets  or a list of closed tick   ets  You can also create a number of trouble ticket reports  In addition  obsolete tickets  can be deleted from the list of closed tickets     3 9 Multiuser Support    MACS is a multi user system  A number of users can monitor alarms or perform vari   ous control and configuration tasks concurrently and independently from any other  user on the system     3 10 Remote Access    You can access the system remotely either via the serial line connections or the local  area network  Remote access via serial lines can be used as long as at least one com   puter on the local area network is configured to support a dial in modem line     Similarly  serial ports used by the system to communicate with the equipment can be  configured to connect either directly to the equipment  or to use dial up modem con     10 Micus Alarm and Control System    Introduction    nections     3 11 Networking    MACS fully supports LAN and WAN connections  as well as dial in modem connec   tions  The system may be configured to use any physical network topology as long as  the TCP IP protocol is available for that network  Therefore  the system may run on t
130. e window is kept in the system configuration database   To superimpose your status and control points on the background image  you will use  the MACS Display Editor     8 2 Elements Of A Custom Screen    The layout of a custom screen created using the Display Editor depends on the  contents of the window  In general  your custom screen will fall into one of the  following categories     e Summary screens  e Status screens    e Control screens    8 2 1 Summary Screens    Summary Screens are custom screens that contain only the summary points   Summary screens are typically used to display regional maps or building layouts  In  these screens  summary points indicate any alarm condition existing within a given  site  or in a given piece of equipment     Typically  summary points have push buttons  Each push button is linked to the next  screen  Clicking on a summary point push button displays the next screen  which  usually presents the site or the equipment in more detail     When a summary screen is displayed  its summary points are initialized to the last  status known to the system  After that  the presentation of the summary points on the    222 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    screen will change as the changes in status are detected in the associated site or  equipment     Refreshing the equipment status can be a very time consuming process  especially  when monitoring remote sites over dial up lines  For example  if your custom screen  contains
131. ece of equipment     User defined monitors are windows that you create by yourself  using the Display Edi   tor  These windows can contain alarm points from any location and any equipment  combined into a single window  You can create as many user defined windows as you  want     Both equipment specific and user defined windows are accessed from the Monitors  pull down menu  In addition  the Monitors menu also contains the Command Line  command  This command allow you to control the equipment using the equipment   s  native user interface     Finally  the Monitors window can also contain any number of lines that represent  actions rather than graphical images  Actions are used to run other programs from  within the MACS GUI  For example  you can add a list of actions that display on line    documentation for your equipment  using the Acrobat Reader        6 2 1 Command Line Window    The Command Line window allows you to send a single line command to the selected  equipment and to receive one or more lines in response  You can use the command  line mode to control the equipment only if the equipment supports it  Note that the  command line does not provide a full terminal emulation     To access the Command Line window click on the Monitor pull down menu and select  the Command Line        1  Acrobat Reader is a trademark of Adobe System Inc     60 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking
132. ed  on the previous pages     e Select the MacsMenu program from the Start   gt  Programs   gt  MACS menu     The look of the Start menu on your workstation will depend on whether you use  Windows XP or Windows NT user interface style  as shown in the following pictures         New Office Document E SE      ES Internet Explorer                 wi Colors    wi LogCfg         Za d  la Open Office Document                 L Startup fii  MacsMenu  E Programs HE Command Prompt     MacsMon    CH Documents  gt  A Windows NT Dies   Wi MacsUtl  E EI SC    B 3Com U S  Robotics p  P MenuCig    gt  ettings  Si St EI Administrative Tools  Common  D  i MPEGCfg  S A Find  gt  ei Oracle   OraHome81 3 GP PagerCtg       Hel EI Oracle Installation Products D iP SentryCfg  G Fi ickTi  i TextCig  S Si QuickTime  gt     z  Bun  Si QuickTime for Windows  gt     i TT 4030Cfg  J Si Startup  gt   Ey A8 zwee  ai The 1995 GME    t EI The Print Shop Premier Edition 5 0  gt        ien ann    44 Micus Alarm and Control System       Launch RealOne Player   CD winzip   mi Accessories d  Lan  Games  gt   Lan  PrintMe Internet Printing d   zn SiS 650_651_M650_M652_740  gt   Lan  SoundMAX  gt   ran Startup  gt   7 Adobe Reader 6 0      Internet Explorer    me MSN Explorer   HA  Outlook Express           Internet  Internet Explorer            E mail  Outlook Express    Spider Solitaire    IPGGUI    IPGCfg          s Remote Assistance     windows Media Player  43 Windows Messenger    Notepad        S  S  i  i  a 
133. ed to work with any number of serial ports  up to  a maximum of 255  which is imposed by the Windows operating system  When more  than one port is used  the equipment modules allow for a combination of direct lines  and modem lines     The following figure depicts typical equipment connections to a MACS server     TCP IP LAN connections RS422 multidrop line       RS485 daisy chain       Internal or external modem bank    Micus Alarm and Control System 33    Overview    4 15 4 Direct Connections    The equipment can be connected to the MACS server using an RS232  RS422 or  RS485 electrical interface  When the RS232 is used  each equipment unit must be  connected to a dedicated serial port  The RS485 interface allows a number of units to  be daisy chained to a single serial port     Direct connections allow for fast polling  Typically  the equipment is polled every few  seconds  The polling interval is configured individually for each piece of equipment   However  direct connections do not allow unsolicited messages from the equipment   to prevent possible collisions on the line     4 15 5 Dial up Connections    Any number of units can share the same dial up line  as long as they can be uniquely  identified by their respective physical address  However  we usually configure MACS  to use more than one dial up line  to balance the throughput     Typically  the MACS server is configured to use one or more outbound modems to  poll units and to use one or more inbound modems to acce
134. ee cases aaa NEIST in ne eee eee ee ee   199   7 6 6 3  Delete SlOt    oii cicada we eae NR NEE ea ee 199   7 6 6 4 View Slots 1 0    0c ccc eee eee eee 200   7 6 7 MACS IO Plug in BoardS 0    0c cece cee ene eee 201  7 6 7 1 PCl DIO8 Board Configuration   00 0 c eee eee eee eee 201   7 6 7 2 PCl DIO32 EM Board Configuration             00   0s eee ences 203   7 6 7 3 PCI 32REL Board Configuration             00  e seen eee eee 205   7 6 8 Status and Control Points Definition e 207  7 6 8 1 Digital Input Point Definition          0 0 0    cee eee 207   7 6 8 2 Digital Output Point Definition                  00 cee eee eee 209   7 7 Access To Configuration Utilities               0c eee eee 212  7 7 1 Adding Configuration Utilities to Windows Start Menu                    212  7 7 2 Adding Configuration Utilities to MACS GUI         0 2 0  e ee ee eee 213  7 7 3 Add Configuration Unit    216  7 7 4 Modify Utility Configuration          00    cece 217  7 7 5 Delete Configuration Utility         0    c ccc eee 217  7 7 6 View Configuration Utilities    0 2 0    0 cece 218   7 8 Local User Interface Options              00 cece eee eee eee 219  8 Creating Custom ScreensS      e cece cece eeeeeeees 221  8 1 Custom Screen Components              0c eee eee eee eee eens 222  8 2 Elements Of A Custom Screen              000 e eee eee eee eee 222  8 2 1 Summary Screens         00  222  8 2 2 Status Screens   1    eee eee eee eee eee 224    Micus Alarm and Control System v    Table of
135. ee eee eens 81   6 6 Equipment Log icc ccc cee bee ee ee eee Se ee ee EE e 83  6 7 Viewing Options eg fees ded See Peed bee De ae ew ee eee 86  6 7 1 Toolbar Docking   ci cece ER RE eee eee ee eee 87  6 7 2 Toolbar Control us eee ee ee ke ee ee eae 87  6 7 3 Status Battes Rer Ee aan Geenwnw ease Ee UE oe Gales Re Eege 87  6 7 4 About BOK ais cis costa RN CERN wield ere ae ee ee EN 87   6 8 User s Manual  cress secret ive ial eae ene EE ELE STEEN a 89  Et UE 89  6 9 1 Copy Event Log eege Ee d eee ene ate a eae ee KEEN ae EN eee 90  6 9 2 Copy Equipment Log    93  6 9 3 Delete Event Log       20 00  cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee 96  6 9 4 Delete Equipment Log    99  6 10 Configuration EE 103  6 10 1 Select Utility  lt   escenario 103  6 10 2 Configuration Options   0 0    ccc eee 105    ele le ULC Le EES AE    7 1 Color Configuration          0 00 eee eee 107  7 1 1 Starting Colors Configuration Uni    108  7 1 2 Color Selection    0    ccc eee eee eee 110  7 1 3 Color Descriptions 2 6 icc ci ee eae ee ee KKK 111  TAA E e TEE 112  7 1 5 Modify Col  n crni pinsa ena ene e eee eee 113  7 1 6 Delete Colors  wise cicero 114  7 1 7 View ei CEET 115   7 2 Event Logger Configuration            00 cece eee eee eee 116    Micus Alarm and Control System    Table of Contents    7 2 1 Add Event Logger        20 0  ccc e cece eee eee renee eee e eee eeeeeenes 121  7 2 2 Configure Event Logger         0    cece eee eee eee eee eee eee 127  7 2 3 Delete Event Logger         00  c eee eens 
136. ely     Micus Alarm and Control System 27    Overview          TC Ces Trouble Ticketing System Version 1 7   x     te  Dein   mge CR                                        r Open Trouble Tickets Closed Trouble Tickets  Fagin A8 COAT Ticket Site Name Point Name Ticket Site Name Point Name  Byc Pee ter Teen 1 DEMO_2 FRIDGE  eae DEMO_2 AIR CONDITIONER 2 DEMO_2 AIR CONDITIONER  K 2 DEMN 3 AIR_CONNITIONER  men pd ge Trouble Ticket Details  Ticket ID  Site Name  Site Address  Point Name  Point Address   bh   DEMO_2 Je IR CONDITIONER 65  Occurred  Joan 999 3 31 40 PM Description   coouNG FAILURE  Accepted   03 14 1999 12 48 40 PM Technician  John Smith he    m Repair  r Notes   Air Conditioner zl Wir conditioner works when operated manually   Main air conditioner relay tested   Procedure for the air conditioner control circuit  Trace between the computer and PLC shows no  communication     If the unit does not operate properly when manually tumed Cable tested with the brakeout box   on  switch to the standby unit and dismount the main unit for Loose cable connection found between PLC and the RS  further repairs  232 cable   Tested OK     If the unit works properly when switched on manually   check the main relay   Does the command from the computer operates relay  If  not  check the electrical signals between the relay and the  PLC If the electrical signals are correct  replace the relay     If the command from the computer cannot control PLC  output  check if the computer can opera
137. ent Logger responsibilities is to dispatch event reports to all other  MACS components that need to receive and process the event reports  Examples of  these components are     e MACS GuUls  running on the MACS server itself  and on any number of other  workstations on the network    e Pager service    e Trouble ticketing service    MACS GuUls log into the Event Logger and log out of it dynamically  You do not have  to configure your Event Logger to accept login from GUIs  Other MACS components   such as pager and trouble ticketing  require the Event Logger to forward event reports  to their respective network locations     For example  if you run your pager service on the workstation called  C US  and you  configure your pager service to listen to the TCP IP protocol port 4464  you will have  to configure your Event Logger to forward all event reports to the computer  C US   and to the protocol port 4464     To configure your event report forwarding  select your event logger from the list in the  Event Log Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the Event Reporting push  button     128 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    The Event Reporting dialog box has the following layout              Event Reporting  MACS Recipients Selected Recipients  LOGGER DOSITEJ 4464  PAGER    Computer name   DOSITEJ  Protocol Port   4464       Delete       Exit                   MACS Recipients list contains all possible event reportrecipients known to your  MACS system
138. ervice uses this name on startup  to  query its configuration from the database  If there is a mismatch in  names  the service will not find its configuration and will not start  properly     Micus Alarm and Control System 121    Configuration    Computer name    Protocol port    Text Event Log    Text log path    Binary Event Log    Binary log path    edit box allows you to specify the name of the computer your  event logger will run on  This name is used  in conjunction with  the protocol port  by other computers and programs on your net   work to establish a TCP IP connection with your event logger     edit box allows you to specify the TCP IP protocol port your event  logger will listen to service requests from other computers and  programs on your TCP IP network     check box allows you to select whether your event logger will  maintain the text event log  This box is normally checked  which  means that the event logger will create and maintain a set of daily  created event log text files     edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  which will contain the event log text files     check box allows you to select whether your event logger will  maintain the binary event log  This box is normally unchecked   which means that the event logger will not create and maintain a  set of daily created event log binary files  Note that to use and  analyze the binary event log  you need a special set of tools     which are not part of our standard MACS pr
139. es of  equipment into a logical chain  and show them all within a single screen     When a status screen is displayed  the points are initialized to the last status known to  the system  After that  the presentation of the points on the screen will change as the  changes in status are detected in the associated equipment     When monitoring a remote site over a dial up line  refreshing the equipment status  can be a time consuming process  For this reason  the status screens initially use only  the status already known to the system     Unlike summary screens  the status screens do provide means for a dynamic refresh   When the system determines that a given screen contains at least one input point or  read only output point  it automatically displays at the bottom of the screen a toolbar  that contains a Refresh push button     Some typical status screens are depicted in the following picture     224 Micus Alarm and Control System    fii  Video and Audio Monitor       RUN CHANNEL    VIDEO AUDIO 2    O    e       AUDIO 1          Creating Custom Screens       AUDIO3    AUDIO 4          AUDIO 2    AUDIO 4          fi  Plato Of xi          n                   REFRESH       REFRESH              Administrative  J  Operational W    Interface  Status             Micus Alarm and Control System       225    Creating Custom Screens    8 2 3 Control Screens    Control Screens are custom screens that may contain one or more summary points  and input points  but must contain at least one
140. ess  Inputs    Outputs    Exit    202    read only box contains the slot name   read only box contains the slot number     group of controls shows 8 digital inputs  Input points that are  actually used are indicated by their respective names  To add a  new input point  select an unused point and click on the adjacent  push button  To modify an existing point configuration  click on  the push button next to the point name     group of controls shows 8 relays  Relays that are actually used  are indicated by their respective names  To add a new relay   select an unused output point and click on the adjacent push but   ton  To modify an existing output point configuration  click on the  push button next to the point name     push button closes the 8 Point Slot Configuration dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 6 7 2 PCI DIO32 EM Board Configuration    The PCI DIO32 EM board consists of 16 digital inputs and 16 relays  When you  select a PCI DIO32 EM slot in the Slot Configuration dialog box and click on the  Configure Points push button  the 32 Output Point Slot Configuration dialog box will  pop up on the screen  This dialog box has the following layout     32 Output Point Slot Configuration X     Name   PCI 32REL  Address  3    m Outputs  A  RELAY 1 17   RELAY 17       D  1  E  zl  SI  EE         16   RELAY 16  32   RELAY 32                Micus Alarm and Control System 203    Configuration    At the top of the dialog box you will see the slot nam
141. essible from the MACS  GUI  When you run this program for the first time  this list will be empty  The push  buttons in the dialog box are used as follows     Add allows you to add a new configuration utility to the list    Modify allows you to modify an existing configuration utility program path   Delete allows you to remove an already configured utility from the list   Open allows you to run the selected configuration utility  by highlighting    the utility name and then clicking on the Open push button     View allows you to create a report that contains a list of all configuration  utility names and paths     Exit exits the MacsUt  program     Micus Alarm and Control System 215    Configuration    7 7 3 Add Configuration Utility    To add a new configuration utility to the list  click on the Add push button  The Add  Utility dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the following layout     Utility Name    Program Path       Add Utility X     Utility name   Program path                             edit box allows you to specify the utility name that will appear in  the Configuration Utilities dialog box in the MACS main GUI     edit box allows you to specify a fully qualified path to the program  to execute  The format you enter will depend on whether you  want to allow access from the local workstation only  or across  the network  An example for the local path is    C  MACS Programs MacsUtl exe    To allow access across the network  use a path of the fol
142. f this book  To open the on   line User   s Manual click on the Help pull down menu and select User   s Manual     d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog View Archive Configuration Help    About MACS     aa    EE  amp    EI ie J 7 A EI 2   El User s Manual      Alternatively  you can click on the User   s Manual icon        El MACS User   s Manual    6 9 Archive    During its operation  MACS will create a number of event log and equipment log files   Over a period of time  MACS will collect a large amount of data  which requires careful  management and from time to time needs to be archived and reduced to the amount  of data you actually need for your day to day operation     The MACS GUI offers a number of archive commands  which assist you in managing  your event log information  There are two groups of archive commands     e Commands to copy files to another directory on the same computer or across the  network     e Commands to delete old event log or equipment log files    Copy commands allow you to archive your event log files or equipment log files into a  directory of your choice  Your destination directory could be on the same computer or  on any other Windows NT workstation on your Microsoft Network        5  The Acrobat Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc     Micus Alarm and Control System 89    Commands    Typically  you may want to keep on line up to six months worth of event log files  and  to a
143. f you  leave the warning sound field blank  no sound will be played when your GUI receives  warning messages     220 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 Creating Custom Screens    This section describes how to create MACS custom screens using the Display Editor   The Display Editor is an optional MACS component  used by the system integrators  and end users to add application specific screens to the MACS configuration     MACS detects status changes and alarm conditions in two ways  by passively monitor   ing the equipment  or by actively polling the equipment status  Unsolicited messages  from the equipment or responses to the polls are then translated into the user defined  status and alarm messages  In addition to the text messages displayed in the scrolla   ble window  changes in the equipment status and alarms are also shown in graphical  monitor and control windows  Each time a given point changes its status  the point rep   resentation in a graphical window can change its color  orientation on the screen  size  or displayed numerical value     To monitor and control the equipment  you can create any number of monitor and con   trol windows  Typically  these windows contain geographical maps  building layouts   equipment racks  equipment diagrams  equipment front panels and electrical schemat   ics  A single window may combine points from various pieces of equipment  While the  status and alarm points only reflect equipment status  the control
144. for each node  When the GUI starts   by default it opens the database it was connected to during the last session  Once you  start your GUI  you can dynamically switch from one database to another     To configure access to your MACS from the individual workstations on your network   you will use the User Interface Configuration Utility program MenuCfg  Depending on  the way your system is administered  this utility may or may not be accessible from the  MACS main GUIL       To access the user interface configuration utility from your workstation desktop  click  on Start   gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt MenuCfg        6  Some network administrators do not want to make configuration utilities accessible to all users  In such cases   these utilities are installed only on the workstations used by the system administrators  Others prefer to make  configuration programs accessible from the MACS main user interface  The choice is yours  and the way you  access configuration utilities is a field configurable option     Micus Alarm and Control System 131    Configuration         Set Program Access and Defaults       W Windows Catalog     Windows Update  AOL for Broadband                            ea       ke EC  eeh    8 Windows Messenger MenuCfg            PagerCfg       Location  C  MACS Programs    MacsMeni     M  Microsoft Developer Network  gt      EH Microsoft visual C   6 0  gt   H Real  gt   EH winzip  gt   Ei MSN Messenger 6 0   All Programs Q  RealOne Player    start KIR
145. g selected files to the des   tination directory    Stop push button terminates the process of copying files    Progress bar graphically indicates the progress in copying selected files to the    destination directory     6 9 2 Copy Equipment Log    MACS maintains its equipment log in a set of dedicated directories  one per each unit  attached to the system  It creates one equipment log file per day for each of the units   Over a period of time  MACS will generate a number of daily equipment log files  You  may decide to keep on line a month or two worth of log files and to archive the rest   The Copy Equipment Log command allows you to copy your log files to another  directory  This directory may reside on another disk drive  a floppy  or on a network  drive on another computer on your network     To start with  you have to select an equipment log using the Equipment Selection  dialog box  Once you select the equipment  you can select the equipment log files you  want to archive     The Copy Equipment Log dialog box has two groups of controls  List of files and Desti   nation directory  The first group allows you to select the log files that you want to  archive  while the second group allows you to specify the destination directory     To copy log files  first select the time period  then click on the Select Files button  The  program will list all log files for the selected time period in a scrollable list box  Each file  is displayed with a checkbox  indicating whether to
146. g the set  click on the No push button     8 9 1 4 View Enumerated Sets    To create a report that contains a list of all enumerated sets  open the Select  Enumerated Sets dialog box and click on the View Sets push button  The system will  create a report and present it on the screen using the WordPad text editor  From  within the editor  you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for keywords   cut and paste  and perform other functions typical of WordPad  A typical report layout  is depicted in the following figure     264 Micus Alarm and Control System    Enumerated values     Set Ip   Enumerated values        Micus Alarm and Control System        Enumerated Sets   Notepad  File Edit Format wiew Help    CANADIAN SET    1   Global  8   CBC  6    CNN  33   Showcase  39   Space  50   Bravo   40     US SET    2   CNN  TBS  Fox  NBC       Creating Custom Screens    265    Creating Custom Screens    8 9 2 Enumerated Set Values    Once you create an enumerated set  you have to add enumerated values to it   Enumerated values are pairs of numerical values and associated descriptions  To add  values to an enumerated set  open the Select Enumerated Set dialog box  highlight  the set you want to add values to  and click on the Define Values push button  The  Select Enumerated Value dialog box will pop up on the screen        Select Enumerated Value    Configure Value  Add Value    Delete Value      View Values            Exit                     The scrollable list on 
147. gured MACS  nodes  Each entry consists of the name of the MACS node and the name of the host  computer     Configure Node push button allows you to modify configuration of an existing  MACS node  To change node configuration  select its name from  in the list and click on the Configure Node push button     Add Node push button allows you to add a new MACS node to the configu   ration database     Delete Node push button allows you to delete an existing MACS node from the  configuration database  To delete node  select its name from in  the list and click on the Delete Node push button     View Nodes push button allows you to create and view a text report that con   tains a list of all presently configured MACS nodes     138 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Exit push button closes the MACS Node Selection dialog box and  returns to the User Interface Configuration Utility main window     7 3 5 1 Add MACS Node    To add a new MACS node to your configuration database  open the MACS Node  Selection dialog box and click on the Add Node push button  The New MACS Node  Configuration dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog box has the following  layout        New MACS Node Configuration    MACS Node Name   00  Database ID  0   Computer Name  SSES   ODBC Data Source Name  PO   Database Login Account  ayy   Database Login Password  fn   Bitmap Files Path  PO   MACS Root Path  PO       Save Quit    Save                     MACS Node Name edit box allows you to
148. h WA sl k    MACS Server  2    Remote access to  your in house    network Ke  ES    al cal a Workstations            Micus Alarm and Control System 13    Overview    The MACS server typically interfaces more than one type of equipment  Each type of  equipment is supported by a dedicated computer program  implemented as a  Windows NT service  The service  also referred to as the Equipment Module  commu   nicates with the equipment and executes the equipment specific commands  Usually   the equipment is attached to the computer via the serial lines  but equipment modules  also support TCP IP network connections to the equipment  The MACS server can  run under the Windows XP Professional operating system  Windows 2000  Workstation operating system or Windows NT Workstation 4 0 operating system  Note  that the MACS server does not require a server operating system     MACS clients provide a user interface to the system  The clients run on any MS  Windows workstations that may be located anywhere on the TCP IP network   including dial up and point to point connections using the Point To Point  PPP   protocol and Remote Access Service  RAS   A client can also run on the MACS  server itself     4 1 1 MACS Servers    MACS servers are responsible for the data acquisition and equipment control  A  MACS server is a dedicated computer that runs one or more MACS Windows NT  services  also referred to as the equipment modules     Each type of equipment connected to the MACS server is suppo
149. h button  Note that this dialog box does not allow  you to modify user name and pager ID  You can only delete a  user and then add it again     edit box allows you to specify a user name when adding a new  user to the pager configuration     edit box allows you to specify a pager ID when adding a new user  to the pager configuration     push button allows you to delete an existing user from the list  To  delete a user  select his or her name from the list and click on the  Delete User push button  The following dialog box will pop up        Pager Users       A Are you sure you want to delete this user                 To delete the selected user  click on the Yes push button  To exit  without deleting the user  click on the No push button     push button allows you to view a list of all possible pager mes   sages assigned to a particular user  To view the list  select a user  name by highlighting it in the list box  and then click on the View  User push button  The system will create a report containing all  possible messages assigned to the selected user  and present  that report using the WordPad text editor  From within the editor   you can view the report  print it or save it in a text file  You can  also search for keywords  cut and paste selected sections  and  perform other functions typical of WordPad     A typical report layout is depicted in the following figure     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration       Michael Bankovitch   Notepad    a    aax       N
150. han one computer and that it runs more than one program to perform its functions   Your equipment and sensors that you wish to monitor communicate with the server   You and other operators use the Graphical User Interface  GUI  programs to access  the MACS  Your GUI program is referred to as the client     The server is a dedicated computer  which is attached to the equipment via the serial  lines  network connections  and via built in digital inputs and relays  It monitors alarms  from the equipment and periodically polls the equipment to gather additional informa   tion on your equipment operational status  Usually  the server is also connected to  your in house computer network     Each type of equipment connected to the system is supported by an equipment spe   cific program  which runs on your server  The server communicates with the equip   ment and executes equipment specific commands  Some equipment may be attached  to the computer via a serial line  which can be either a direct or a modem connection   Other equipment supports Ethernet connections which provide faster and more reli   able communication  In addition  you can use built in digital inputs to monitor contact  closures  and built in relays to control external devices     8 Micus Alarm and Control System    Introduction    When a client sends a request to operate the equipment to the server  the server exe   cutes the request  and sends a response back to the client     From your workstation  you connect to 
151. have to name this utility Graphic Editor  This can be done using the Configuration Util   ities program MacsUtl  which is described earlier in this manual in Access To Configu   ration Utilities     For example  to select Microsoft Paint as your default graphic editor and make it  accessible from the Display Editor toolbar  you will have to configure the Graphic Edi   tor utility as follows        Add Utility LG    Utility name   Graphic Editor  Program path  Imspaintese       Add Cancel                   Note that from some other graphic editors  such as Adobe PhotoShop  you may be  required to specify a fully qualified path to the program  A fully qualified path for the  local access on your workstation will be similar to the following example     C  Program Files Adobe PhotoShop 5 0 LE photosle exe    8 5 Starting Display Editor    You can invoke your Display Editor either from the Windows Start menu or  if so  configured  from the MACS main GUI  To start it from the Windows Start menu  click  on Start   gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt  MacsEditor  as depicted in the following picture     228 Micus Alarm and Control System         Set Program Access and Defaults    w  4 Windows Update   AOL for Broadband     Launch RealOne Player    SD winzip     Accessories    Windows Catalog       Creating Custom Screens    Internet Games Colorcf  E Internet Explorer a d 3  ei PrintMe Internet Printing iP DemoCfg  E mail  We Outlook Express    E SiS 650_651_MeS0_M652_740 dh IPGcta  3 So
152. he  token ring and Ethernet networks  and across wide area networks  using bridges and  routers  To communicate over the dial up serial lines  your server and your clients can  use the Point To Point Protocol  PPP  and Remote Access Service  RAS      3 12 Online Diagnostics    All server programs have powerful built in real time online diagnostics that can be used  in the field to verify system configuration and to monitor operation of the external sys   tem interfaces     Online diagnostics can be accessed remotely by our customer support personnel to  assist you in configuring and running the system     Micus Alarm and Control System 11    Introduction    12 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 Overview    This section briefly describes MACS architecture and provides some details on the  system internals  This information is provided for those who want to learn more about  MACS operation  In particular  it will be a useful reference for the system administra   tors  If your goal is only to learn how to use the system  you can proceed to the next  section     4 1 MACS Architecture    MACS is a distributed application  which consists of one or more MACS servers and  clients  MACS servers are responsible for data acquisition and equipment control   while clients provide the user interface to the system     Other switches        S mememl  Other equipment                    Telephony  Switch Eo O  Pm         Remote Site  j Ce s Monitors        EE  Cell   PSTN    Switc
153. he Modify User Interface dialog box has the same layout as the Add User Interface  dialog box     7 3 3 Delete User Interface    To disallow login access to a workstation  highlight the workstation name in the left  hand side list box  and then highlight a particular event logger name in the right hand  side list box  Then  click on the Delete push button  The program will delete the    136 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    selected event logger name from the list  Once there are no more event loggers  assigned to the selected workstation  the program will also delete the workstation  name from the left hand side list     If you have only one event logger in your system  then deleting access to that logger  will also delete the workstation name from the list     7 3 4 View User Interfaces    To view your present user interfaces configuration  click on the View GUIs push  button     The system will create a report and present it as a text file using the WordPad text  editor  Using the editor  you can save the report in a file  print it  cut and paste the text   and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The report layout is depicted in the  following picture                        ST     2  MACS GUIs Configuration Report txt   WordPad BAX  File Edit View Insert Format Help   Cel R a  x BS   ID Event Source Connect On Startup GUI Host Server Host Server Port   ak LOGGER YES DOSITEJ DOSITEJ 4448   2 LOGGER YES PUPIN DOSITEJ 4448   3 SENTRY No DOSITEJ DOSITE
154. he PCI DIO32M board has 16 digital inputs  and 16 relays and the PCI 32REL board has 32 REED relays  While configuring your  MACS IO module  you have to inform the MACS software which slots are populated   and with which MACS IO boards     The following pages illustrate how to add and how to modify slots in the MACS IO  module configuration  Once you assign some plug in boards to the slots in your  MACS IO module  you can always reassign them and delete them  You can also add  more slots to your MACS IO module at a later date  The most important consideration  is that the plug in board slot assignment in the configuration database must match the  actual hardware installed in the MACS server itself     196 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Before you start monitoring and controlling a MACS IO module  you have to add at  least one slot to its configuration  You will manage your MACS IO slots using the Slot  Configuration dialog box  This dialog box allows you to add  modify  view or delete  slots from the selected MACS IO module     To enter the Slot Configuration dialog box  select a MACS IO module in the main  MACS IO Configuration dialog box  and click on the Configure Slots push button  The  dialog box has the following layout        Slot Configuration    1  PCI DIO8 Configure Slot  2  PCI DIO32 EM    4  PCI 32REL          Delete Slot  Configure Points  View Slots    Exit                   The scrollable list box on the left hand side contains the names of 
155. he event  reporting and event log files location within your system     is a configuration utility program used to configure the paging ser   vices     is a configuration utility program used to configure the e mail and  fax messaging  MAPI  services     is a configuration utility program used to define which workstation  has access to which individual MACS components  Typically  this  utility is used only during the MACS installation process     is an optional configuration program that allows you to create your  own graphical screens  This program is usually referred to as the  Display Editor  Like the other configuration programs  the display  editor is typically installed only on workstations used to administer  the MACS system     is an optional configuration utility program used to configure end   user custom monitor and control windows  This program is usually  used as an integral part of the display editor  described above     Micus Alarm and Control System 39    Getting Started    MacsLogger exe is a special equipment module  dedicated to event reporting and  login  and to the user login onto the MACS  If you have only a sin   gle type of equipment attached to your system  you may not need  the MACS logger  However  if you want to monitor and control  more than one type of equipment  or if you want to use the pager   e mail or fax  you will need the logger     MacsPager exe is an optional equipment module  dedicated to sending pager  messages   MacsMAPI exe is an opt
156. heir  respective toolbar icons  This section just briefly introduces the system commands     52 Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started    These commands are presented in detail in the following sections of this document     Exit   Connect  Disconnect  Command Line    Status Monitor    allows you to exit the GUI   allows you to manually connect to the MACS server   allows you to manually disconnect from the MACS server     allows you to send single line  equipment specific commands to  the selected unit  and to receive responses from the unit     allows you to select a user defined monitor window from a list   and to open that window     Equipment Specific Monitor    Select MACS Node    allows you to select an equipment specific monitor window from a  list  and to open that window     allows you to disconnect from one MACS database and to con   nect to another MACS database without restarting the GUI     Equipment Lock allows you to lock the selected piece of equipment  thus prevent   ing other operators from operating that equipment    Send Message allows you to manually compose and send a pager message to  the selected recipient    View Event Log allows you to view all event reports reported on any given day    View Equipment Log    View Toolbar    View Status Bar    allows you to view the raw input received from the selected equip   ment on any given day     allows you to select whether the toolbar appears on the screen or  not     allows you to select whether th
157. hen you need to shutdown your computer   You may want to shut down the GUI on your workstation every day before you leave  your office  Note that shutting down the GUI will not affect the server operation  The  MACS server will continue to monitor your equipment and to process alarms even  when there is no GUI logged in     5 2 1 MACS Services Shutdown    To stop MACS services  use the Windows Services manager  How to access the  Services manager differs between operating systems     5 2 1 1 Windows XP    To stop any of the MACS services  login to your MACS server  Then open the Control  Panel by clicking on Start   gt  Control Panel  In the Control Panel  double click on the  Administrative Tools icon  When you open the Administrative Tools dialog box  double  click on the Services icon     In the Windows XP services manager highlight the service that you want to stop and  click the right mouse button  A pull down list will appear  Select the Stop option and  click the left mouse button  as shown in the next picture     46 Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started       File Action View Help       a   mb        MEDB                       AR   z  Gen Services  Local  By Servi  l    MACS Event Logger Name    Sa Internet Connectio     stop the service IPG Quality Control      Restart the service rae Sb  By IPv   Internet Conn       Bs Logical Disk Manager  Sy Logical Disk Manage      amp B_mMacs Demo Server         MACS MAPI Service  MACS Pager  Messenger   Syms Softwar
158. hin the editor  you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for  keywords  cut and paste report contents  and perform other functions typical of  WordPad  The following picture illustrates a typical report layout           MAPI Server Configuration   Notepad BAX   Eile Edit Format View Help   Server name  MACS MAPI A  30       DOSITEJ  Protocol port  4450    Event reporting   DOSITEJ  4443  List of units   MACS MAPI    MAPI users     Michael Bankovitch  FAX  4933623  Anonymous  FAX 4933623  Stewart Jones  5tewart company com          176 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 5 5 MAPI Event Reporting    During its operation your MAPI interface will generate a number of event reports   informing you about e mail and fax messages it sends and about problems encoun   tered while trying to send MAPI messages  Typically  the interface is configured to  send its event reports to the event logger  which in turn forwards these reports to all  other recipients     To configure your MAPI interface to send event reports to the event logger  highlight  the interface name in the MAPI Configuration utility main dialog box and click on the  Event Reporting push button     The Event Reporting dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the  following layout        Event Reporting       MACS Recipients Selected Recipients  DOSITEJ 4448          Computer name   DOSITEJ  Protocol Port   4446 Add Delete      Exit                      MACS Recipients _ is
159. how your network resources as well  by clicking on  the Network button     Network adds your Microsoft Network resources to the initial display of  your local disk drives and folders     Copy starts the process of copying selected files to the destination  directory    Stop terminates the process of copying files    Progress bar graphically indicates the progress in copying selected files to the    destination directory     6 9 3 Delete Event Log    Over a period of time  MACS will create a number of daily event log files  You may  decide to keep on line a month or two worth of event log files and to archive the rest   First  use the Copy Event Log command to copy old event log files to your archive  media  After that you can use the Delete Event Log command to remove the originals     Your MACS can be configured to maintain more than one event log  In such case  the  system will prompt you to select the event log from which you want to delete files     To delete event log files  first select the time period  then click on the Select Files  button  The program will list all event log files for the selected time period in a scrol   lable list box  Each file is displayed with a checkbox  indicating whether to delete this  file or not  Initially  all checkboxes are checked  You can uncheck those files that you  don   t want to delete     Once you select the event log files to delete  click on the Delete button  You can stop  the process by clicking on the Stop button     96 Micu
160. ify any point in your custom screen at any time  First  select it in your  custom screen by clicking anywhere on the point rectangle  Make changes by  selecting another display style  or modifying coordinates and size  and then click on  the Modify push button  To save your changes in the database  click on the Save  push button     8 11 6 Deleting Points    You can always delete a point from your custom screen  First select it by clicking  anywhere on the point rectangle and then click on the Delete push button     286 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 11 7 Nested Custom Screens    In this example  you will link two custom screens together  and use a summary in the  top level screen to open the lower level nested screen  You will use a regional map to  display a summary alarm point that opens a site diagram     Let us assume that your regional map looks somewhat like this     North Bay    Sag  Qu  bec Ze           Fany Sound Ontario  e  e     A  Torn   Kihener    y    le    Let us further assume that you have a piece of equipment that monitors your Toronto  site  If any alarm is received from the Toronto site  you want the summary alarm on  your map to become active  When you click on it  you want to open the Toronto site  block diagram     First  you need to add a summary point for the Toronto site to your regional map  To  do so  select the summary point     e From the Source pull down list  select UNIT POINTS   e From the Server pull down list
161. iguration name  The main MAPI Configuration dialog box will pop up  on the screen  The dialog box layout is depicted in the following picture        1  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained later in this document  in Access To Con   figuration Utilities     172 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration          MACS MAPI Configuration    MACS MAPI Configure Server  Add Server     Delete Server     MAPI Users     Event Reporting   View Server     MAPI Account      Exit                        The push buttons and their functions are     Configure Server  Add Server  Delete Server  MAPI Users  Event Reporting  View Server  MAPI Account    Exit    allows you to modify the configuration of an already configured  MAPI interface     allows you to add a new MAPI interface to your system configura   tion     allows you to delete an existing MAPI interface from your system  configuration     allows you to configure your e mail and fax message recipients     allows you to specify computers and programs on your network   which will receive event reports from the MAPI interface program  being configured     allows you to create a text report that contains your MAPI inter   face present configuration     allows you to specify which MAPI account and password to use to  send e mail and fax messages     exits the MAPI Configuration utility     Micus Alarm and Control System 173    Configuration    7 5 1 Add MAPI Interface    When you run the MAP  Configura
162. ilable for further analysis if saved into the  binary event log     The following picture depicts GUI main window  with a number of status and alarm  messages     Ee     i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 S m E    Eile Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog View Archive Configuration Help    Seege Ac ai   lel       11 27 1999 15 22 56 DEMO 2 FRIDGE    11 27 1999 15 23 00 DEMO 2 FRIDGE Is CLOSED    11 27 1999 15 23 08 DEMO 2 DOOR IS OPEN                In addition to the text messages displayed in the scrollable window  changes in the  equipment status and alarms are also shown in all graphical monitor and control  windows  Each time a given point changes its status  the color of the point displayed  in the window changes accordingly     4 4 Monitor And Control Windows    To monitor and control the equipment  you can create any number of monitor and con   trol windows  Typically  these windows contain geographical maps  building layouts   equipment racks  equipment diagrams  equipment front panels  etc     18 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    To monitor and control the equipment  the users can create any number of monitor  and control windows  Typically  these windows contain geographical maps  building  layouts  equipment racks  equipment diagrams  equipment front panels  electrical  circuit schematics  and other diagrams     bid Regional Map                      i       STATUS PROG PRESETS VIDEO AUDIO  mm HEE      REMOTETIMERS DATA CONFIG ALARMS   
163. ilding layout window with the equipment racks  secured doors  environment and  power alarms etc  Finally  by clicking on a particular rack  the operator displays the  equipment block diagram or a front panel     24    Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 5 Configuration    All key system parameters are field configurable  The system configuration includes  the type of equipment connected to the computer  the number of units connected to  each serial port  polling intervals  point definitions  networking parameters and more   System configuration is done using a set of configuration utilities  all of which are  based on aconsistent  user friendly GUI  All configuration parameters are stored in the  configuration database     In addition  MACS provides the means to configure and initialize various pieces of  equipment  such as intelligent modems  satellite communications equipment  and  programmable logic controllers  Depending on the equipment  configuration can be  done using the command line mode interface or equipment specific configuration  utilities     To communicate with the database  MACS uses the Microsoft Open Database  Connectivity  ODBC  interface and the Structured Query Language  SQL   This means  that any industry standard database engine can be used  as long as the ODBC driver  is available for it     To configure the system  you must define the servers  the units attached to the  servers  the slots within each unit  and the points  You also need to 
164. ility program  LogCfg  Depending on the way your system is administered  this utility may or may not  be accessible from the MACS main GUI     Micus Alarm and Control System 117    Configuration       To access the event log configuration utility from your workstation desktop  click on  Start   gt  All Programs   gt  MACS   gt LogCfg       Set Program Access and Defaults          W Windows Catalog      Windows Update  AOL For Broadband     Launch RealOne Player  CD winzip  Lal Accessories  gt   Internet Games  gt   E Internet Explorer a    Lal PrintMe Internet Printing b wi ColorCfg  E mail  G Outlook Express H sis 650_651_M650_m652_740   gt     f   DemoCfg  EH Soundmax  gt    FP IPGCfg  oe Spider Solitaire  3 Startup  gt    FP Peau  UI  ege Is Adobe Reader 6 0 bd Loacfa  x  Internet Explorer wi Macsbd  location  C  MACS Programs  MSN Explorer MacsManager  fa Notepad M j i i   G  Outlook Express i MacsMenu  i IPGCfg gel Remote Assistance iP MacsUtl     Windows Media Player iP Mapicfg  A WordPad Ki Windows Messenger i MenuCfa  wi PagerCfg  i ae  m  Microsoft Developer Network  Microsoft visual C   6 0  1 Paint a    Real   F Data Sources  ODBC ei WinZip    J   MSN Messenger 6 0  All Programs    gt      RealOne Player  L  Log orf  Q  Turn off Computer  Start  Dee 3 56 Pm             3  Some network administrators do not want to make configuration utilities accessible to all users  In such cases   these utilities are installed only on the workstations used by the system administr
165. int also has a name   and the Display Editor uses these names to allow you to select points to display     In addition to the individual status and control points  the Display Editor also allows  you to use summary points  Summary points are containers that change status if any  individual point within that container changes its status  For example  the unit  summary point will change status if any individual point within that unit changes  status  The server summary point will change status if any unit within that server  changes status     Finally  the Display Editor also allows you to use static points  as a convenient way to  display location names  equipment names and similar items  Such items do not  change status but differ from one site to the other  For example  this feature will allow  you to use the same block diagram as a background image for several different sites   while using static points to display site and equipment names     The section of the Display Editor window that allows you to select points is depicted in    the following picture   Source  fio POINTS DI  Server   Macs DEMO DI Ge  Unit   DEMO_1 DI 20    Point  Jg 7  Type  Analog Input                   Source pull down list allows you to select what kind of point you want to  include in your screen     IO POINTS are most commonly used  This selection allows you  to select individual equipment status and control points and add  them to your screen     UNIT POINTS allow you to select status and control
166. ional equipment module  dedicated to sending e mail    and fax messages  This program works in conjunction with the  Windows NT native messaging  MAPI  services     Macs Ticket exe is an optional equipment module responsible for the creating and  processing trouble tickets     TestClient exe is a freely distributed MACS diagnostics utility     5 1 MACS Startup    The following pages explain how to start and how to stop your MACS  To start MACS   first you need to start all server components  Once they start properly  you can start  your GUI  Similarly  to stop the system  you stop your GUls  and then you stop your  server components     You may want to start and stop the GUI on your workstation on a daily basis   However  once started  the server components typically run for months without inter   ruption  The only reason to occasionally stop them are changes in the MACS configu   ration and computer maintenance     5 1 1 MACS Services Startup    All MACS equipment modules are implemented as Windows NT services  Therefore   these components could be either configured to start automatically when you boot the  computer  or you could start them manually from the Windows NT Services manager     To start a given MACS equipment module automatically  you could select the  automatic startup option when you install it  However  we recommend that you always  select manual startup to start with  Once you verify that your configuration works  correctly  you can change the startup from ma
167. ipment  Module D    Equipment em D  Module E  RS485  SNMP i  Module  Lem  TCP IP connections    a a       Micus Alarm and Control System 15    Overview    4 1 2 MACS Clients    MACS clients are MS Windows applications that provide a user interface to the  system  A client connects to one or more servers using the TCP IP protocol  The  connections can be established through local or wide area network  or using the RAS  connections over telephone lines  Once connected to the system  the client receives  all event reports from the servers  The client can also connect to a particular server  and operate the attached equipment     MACS clients also provide a set of commands to view  print  analyze and manage the  event log     Finally  MACS clients encompass a set of utilities  fully integrated into the user  interface  that are used to configure the system     Z   Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 1 0  File Monitor Pager Event Log View Help       My Computer         ine    N  d    etwork  Neighborhood E Region Monitor    of x      e       a  8  2    PS  gt   ag  a5  aa    e    D  g  2  fem  P  2  5    E Remote Station Monitor       E  D      2  ba  o  S  E    Cl    TC UNIT_1    mn  D  pa        5 CAT         016 016  MODULATORS   RESTORAL          a  KR  V  D                   SET   RESET   PULSE   TOGGLE                        Start  Oy Exploring  Debug   MBEAMSDEV Projects L    BA Micus Alam And Contr    MBESMSDEV Projects      l Region Monitor   E Toronto Site JUNT   RE 
168. ist and click on the respective Details push button   The MAPI Event Details dialog box will pop up  This read only dialog box has the  layout depicted in the following picture     184       MAPI Event Details       Point Identification    MAPI Messages    Active above limits text   MACHINE ROOM FANS ON IV  Inactive within limits text   MACHINE ROOM FANS OFF IV  Pulsed below limits text   FANS PULSED              Server name   PYLON  Unit name  es    Slot name   ASM 3 OUTPUTS  Point name  FANS    Send                   Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Point Identification group box contains point identifiers  which are the server  unit   slot and point names     Server name field contains the name of the Windows NT service from which the  message originates     Unit name field contains the name of the equipment unit from which the mes   sage originates     Slot name field contains the name of the slot within the equipment from  which the message originates  Many communication equipment  devices have slots  which are used to install equipment plug in  modules  Equipment that does not have slots is considered a sin   gle slot equipment  meaning that all components are located  within a single  monolithic unit     Point name field contains the name of the point from which the message orig   inates     MAPI Messages group box contains a text field and a Send checkbox for each  point state  A Send checkbox indicates to the MACS whether or  not to include the text
169. it by typing a command into the edit box in the  bottom left corner of the dialog box  Note that you don   t have to type the entire packet  that is actually sent to the unit  You type only the command itself  We will illustrate this  with the Site Sentry equipment  and the SNMP query examples below     A packet to get a full status report from a Site Sentry unit whose physical address is    A   has the following form     UQAS lt CR gt  lt LF gt     In this line  the command to get the full status is    S     The UQA is a packet header in  which    A    is the unit address  The  lt CR gt  lt LF gt  marks the end of the packet  Once you  select the equipment  the system knows exactly how to communicate with it  This is  why you don t have to type the entire line in the above example  All you need to type is     S    The system will automatically add the rest  Once you type your command  you can  send it by pressing  lt ENTER gt  or by clicking on the Send button        2  For details on the Site Sentry equipment  please refer to the Site Sentry supplement documentation     Micus Alarm and Control System 63    Commands    In the next example  let   s assume that you selected a computer that you want to mon   itor using the SNMP protocol  To query the SNMP agent in the computer  you need to  specify the SNMP command  the community name  and one or more object IDs that  you want to query  However  because the system already knows the selected com   puter name and community name  
170. ith the push button   used to select and operate the point  Output points can  be also displayed as read only points  in which case they  can be monitored but not operated from a given window     Points can be displayed as animated switches  The  same point can be mapped onto more than one switch   Switches can be drawn using any size and orientation   and can be displayed in different colors in active and  inactive states     Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Toronto Points can be mapped onto one or more lines  which  change color depending on the point state  This style is  typically used to depict communication links or electrical  circuits        Montreal    Points can be presented as open or closed doors in an  architectural drawing  depicting a building layout  This  style is typically used for the security applications     Point states can be presented using two bitmap draw   ings  one for each state  In this example the active point  state is mapped into a drawing of an open fridge  while  the inactive point state is mapped into a drawing of a  closed fridge        Analog points can also be displayed as gauges  with the  handle optionally changing color when exceeding the  upper or lower threshold        Micus Alarm and Control System 243    Creating Custom Screens    Analog points can be displayed as vertical or horizontal  histograms that optionally change color when their  respective analog values exceed the upper or lower  threshold     
171. l                   Account edit box allows you to specify the account name to use to log into  the Windows NT native MAPI service   Password edit box allows you to specify the password to use to log into the    Windows NT native MAPI service     Subject edit box allows you to specify the contents of the subject field of  your e mail or fax messages     To save you MAPI account configuration  click on the OK push button  To close the  dialog box without saving the contents  click on the Cancel push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 187    Configuration    7 6 MACS IO Configuration    MACS servers come with built in opto isolated inputs and output relays  You can use  inputs to monitor equipment contact closures  and environment and security sensors   For example  you can use output relays to control heating and air conditioning  to  open external gates  and to acknowledge and silence audible alarms     Depending on your exact requirements  you can order a MACS server with a combi   nation of inputs and outputs that best suits best your needs  Up to four slots in the  MACS server chassis can be populated with MACS IO plug in boards  There are  several different boards that you can order  which provide the following IO combina   tions     e 8 opto isolated inputs and 8 mechanical relays    e 16 opto isolated inputs and 16 mechanical relays    e 32 REED relays    To use the MACS server internal IO boards  you have to configure the following   e MACS IO service   e MACS I
172. l Site   MPEG Test wg    CH  basis Mews sue zm                   To open your custom screen  highlight its name and click on the Open push button  or  simply double click on the screen name     8 12 1 Dynamic Testing    Once you save your custom screen into the database  the screen becomes immedi   ately available to the GUI  As soon as you click on the Save button in the Display  Editor  you can open the Monitors dialog box in the MACS main GUI  select the  screen you are working on  and open it  All points on the screen are immediately  operational  This means that you can keep both the Display Editor and the MACS GUI  running together on your workstation  and immediately test additions and changes in  your custom screens     292 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    First  you make an addition or modification using the Display Editor  Then you save the  screen by clicking on the Save push button  After that  you open the screen from the  Monitors dialog box in the MACS GUI  to test it in live action     Subsequent changes in your custom screen will take effect in the MACS GUI the next  time you open the screen from the Monitors dialog box  Therefore  to test your subse   quent changes  you have to close your screen in the MACS GUI and reopen it from  the Monitors dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 293    Creating Custom Screens    294 Micus Alarm and Control System    
173. l be displayed in the MACS user inter   face  but the system will still update all graphical status and con   trol windows     pull down list allows you to select the foreground and background  color combination to use in the event report issued when the  point becomes active     pull down list allows you to select the severity level to use in the  event report issued when the point becomes active     checkbox allows you to specify whether to send a pager mes   sage when the point becomes active     group of controls allows you to define the text  color combination   severity and paging to use when the point becomes inactive     edit box allows you to enter the text to include in the event report  issued when the point becomes inactive  If you leave this field  blank  no event report will be displayed in the MACS user inter   face  but the system will still update all graphical status and con   trol windows     pull down list allows you to select the foreground and background  color combination to use in the event report issued when the  point becomes inactive     pull down list allows you to select the severity level to use in the  event report issued when the point becomes inactive     checkbox allows you to specify whether to send a pager mes   sage when the point becomes inactive     group of controls allows you to define the text  color combination   severity and paging to use when the point is pulsed     Micus Alarm and Control System    Pulsed Text    Pulsed Color    P
174. l points  you can select the ACTIVE or INACTIVE    state   For the analog points  you can select the ABOVE  WITHIN  or BELOW state     When you change the state selection  all points included in your  custom screen will change state accordingly     8 7 3 Selecting Display Styles    When you select a point to include in your custom screen  the Display Editor will  present you with the display styles applicable to the type of the selected point  To  select a style  you click on the drawing that you want to use  A red triangle will show  up  pointing to the currently selected display style     In addition to selecting drawing styles  you can also make your output points read  only  by clicking on the Read Only checkbox  This is used when you want to present  the status of an output point on your screen  but you want to prevent operators from    operating that point     For the analog points  you can select whether to display analog values as decimal  numbers  or using the scientific  or E notation        2  The pulsed state for the digital outputs is a transient state  Therefore it is not included as one of the possible per   manent states for the digital outputs     240    Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    File View Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help    SR eg              Souce  IOPOINTS sl   Sewer  macs oeno 5  Unt   oem   a  Point   TEMERATURE  gt    Type  Analog Input    r Colors  Active Above     Inactive within    DEFAULT MINOR Se  Pulsed Below
175. l points for the 10162P and O16 modules  The names of  all configured points are shown in the appropriate color  depending on the point opera   tional status  Unused points are left blank  Site Sentry slots with no installed modules  are also left blank            i Unit TORONTO SS2 Status And Control    10162P 10162P  SECURITY HYDRO      Main Door  nbn a  Bz    kl     Co                                                                        LI    D          O                      mmm          oppooo  LIEIL     HA                                        Last update  dee neet  i Virtual     Hi Communication Status    RESET PULSE TOGGLE REFRESH                When you invoke a monitor window  all points are displayed using the latest status  information known to the system  From this point on  as the status of the points  change  the monitor will be updated accordingly  To force a status update you can  click on the Refresh button  Updating the equipment status may take some time   especially when the equipment is connected via a dial up line     In the example above  there are two types of points  input points and output points   The input points have two states  active and inactive  While monitoring the equipment   you can only refresh the operational status of these points     Micus Alarm and Control System 69    Commands    The output points are usually relays  They can be set  reset or pulsed  In addition  you  can toggle the output point state  You can also refresh the out
176. layed as a small circle or square  that changes color as the associated point changes its  state  The point name is not displayed  This style is typi   cally used to draw the equipment front panels     Points can be displayed using either full width  half width  or proportional width rectangles  A rectangle contains  the point name and changes its color as the point  changes status  Full and half size rectangles are used to  align points displayed in the window  Proportional width  is used to make the rectangle size proportional to the  point name length        Points can be displayed using either solid or transparent  rectangles  Solid rectangles change both foreground and  background color when the associated point changes  state  Transparent rectangles change only the outline  and the text color  while the background remains visible  through the rectangle     Output points can be displayed with the push button   used to select and operate the point  Output points can  also be displayed as read only points  in which case they  can be monitored but not operated from a given window     Points can be displayed as animated switches  The  same point can be mapped onto more than one switch   Switches can be drawn using any size and orientation   and can be displayed in different colors in active and      inactive states   Baseball Switch       ll  oo  ae    Micus Alarm and Control System 21    Overview       Montreal          22       Points can be mapped onto one or more lines  
177. layout     8 6 1 New Background Image    You can create your background image directly from your graphic editor before  invoking the Display Editor  or you can run your graphic editor within the Display  Editor and then create your background image  By convention  background images  are stored in the MACS Config folder  but you can keep your background images in  any other folder on your network  as long as MACS programs have proper access to  the bitmap files     To run your graphic editor from the Display Editor  select File   gt  New from the main  menu  or click on the Graphic Editor toolbar icon     232 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens           MACS Display Editor Version 3 0 BAX    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help          Graphic Editor    The program will open your graphic editor  Create and save your background image  file  Note that this file must be saved as a bitmap file     While editing the points in your custom screen  you can invoke your graphic editor at  any time to make changes in your background image  To load or to reload your  background image  click on the Load Background toolbar icon          gt  MACS Display Editor Version 3 0  Jog    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help  suale  gi       Load Background    8 6 2 Managing Custom Screens    To add a custom screen to the list of your custom monitor and control windows  you  have to specify your screen name and link it with the background image  To do so  yo
178. ll future event reports to that GUI     The event logger places the GUI on its internal list of all user interfaces active on the  network  and continues to send event reports to that GUI until it receives a logout  request from the GUI     Typically  MACS has only one event logger  However  in large installations  you may  have more than a single event logger  For example  if your monitoring system covers a  large geographical area  you may have a number of regional MACS servers and the  main MACS server in a central location  In such a scenario  your regional servers will  have their own event loggers  while the server in the central location will collate event  reports from all regional servers into its own main event log     To support multi server configurations  you can configure your GUI to log in to one or  more event loggers  Furthermore  you can configure your GUI to login automatically on  startup  or you can login manually  while the GUI is already running     GUI login options are setup for each workstation individually  This means that you can  selectively allow or disallow access to MACS server from one workstation to another  If  you have regional MACS servers  you can also selectively allow access to each  regional server from individual workstations     In a multi server environment  you may have a common database shared among the  servers  or each server may have its own database  Thus  you can define a list of  MACS nodes and specify which database to use 
179. location  As you drag the mouse  the coordinates and size of your  point rectangle will show up in the Point Attributes  In this case  the rectangle size is  predetermined by the selected display style  and the system will accept only the X and  Y coordinates  while the width and length will be ignored     Point Attributes  x  568 v  51 nfo wfo  Options   DEFAULT SCREEN    Max   0 00    Name  v Min    0 00          Note that the Point Attributes box initially shows the DEFAULT SCREEN in the  Options field  The DEFAULT SCREEN option links the summary point with the screen  that depicts the selected equipment itself  This  for example  may be the equipment  front panel or an equipment specific block diagram  In this example  you will select the  NEXT SCREEN option from the pull down list     Micus Alarm and Control System 289    Creating Custom Screens    Point Attributes    x   568 Y  1511 H  fo w  10    Options   DEFAULT SCREEN    Max   0 00     DEFAULT SCREEN in  Next  pull down the list of names with the NEXT SCREEN option selected  You will    get the list of all presently defined custom screens     Point Attributes    x  J568 Y   511 H  fo w   0    Options   NEXT SCREEN v  Max   0 00  Name    Building Layout sl Min   0 00           add Building Layout     S    File Copy Control    GI Encoder    Image Video Monitor          If you select the custom screen called Building Layout  when you click on the  summary point in your regional map  the system will open Building Layout
180. log box and click on the View Actions push button   The system will create a report and present it on the screen using the WordPad text  editor  From within the editor  you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for  keywords  cut and paste  and perform other functions typical of WordPad  A typical  report layout is depicted in the following figure     274 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens       Wiles    d Actions   Notepad       File Edit Format View Help  PREVIEW SWITCH  1   ADOSITEI Dositej ONMACS Programs AstralSwitch exe PREVIEW    TELNET   3  telnet exe  FTP   4   Ttp exe    User s Manual  5  c  Program Files Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Reader AcroRd32  O  MAcS Config MACS User s Manual pdt              8 10 2 Selecting Actions    To include an action push button into your custom screen  select ACTION POINTS in    the Source field  Source  fio POINTS D    Server   Unit     Point           Type     Next  specify the name for the point     Source   ACTION POINTS D  Server    Y      Unit            Point   TORONTO FTP D      Type  Unknown       From the Display Styles pane select the style for the action point     Micus Alarm and Control System 275    Creating Custom Screens         Display Styles     Read Only  F Scientific  IE Action   z  S           W  chon            In the Options field in the Point Attributes  select EXECUTE PROGRAM     Point Attributes  x  fo T fo H  fo wW   o    Options     v  Max    0 00  Name   EXECUTE PROGRAM Min   
181. lowing  form       ICIUS MACS Programs MacsUtl exe    where  C US represents your server name  and MACS must be a  shared disk or folder     To add a new utility program to the list of configuration utilities  click on the Add push  button  To exit without adding a new utility  click on the Cancel push button     216    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 7 4 Modify Utility Configuration    The Modify Utility dialog box allows you to change the path to the program to run when  you select the utility in the Configuration Utilities list in the MACS main GUI     To modify an already configured utility setup  select the name of the utility and click on  the Modify push button  The dialog box has the same layout as the Add Utility dialog    box        Modify Utility    Utility name   Display Editor  Program path   WDOSITEJ Dosite  D Macs Progra                         This dialog box will allow you only to modify the path to the utility program  To modify  the path  click on the Modify push button  To exit without modifying the path  click on  the Cancel push button     7 7 5 Delete Configuration Utility    To delete a configuration utility from the Configuration Utilities list in the MACS main  GUI  highlight the name of the utility and click on the Delete push button  The following    message box will pop up        Macs Configuration Utilities       A   re you sure you want to delete this utility              To delete the utility from the list  click on the Yes
182. lows you to specify which wave file to play upon receiv   ing an event report with the minor severity level  If you leave this  edit box blank  no sound will be played upon receiving a minor  alarm     Warning sound edit box allows you to specify which wave file to play upon receiv   ing an event report with the warning severity level  If you leave  this edit box blank  no sound will be played upon receiving a  warning message  Typically  no sounds are used for the warning  messages     On line User   s Manual    edit box contains a valid command line which  when executed  displays the on line MACS User   s Manual     OK push button saves the settings and closes the dialog box   Cancel push button closes the dialog box without saving the settings     106 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 Configuration    Before you start using your MACS  you need to configure it for your particular applica   tion  All relevant MACS parameters are field configurable  System configuration  includes the type of equipment connected to the computer  number of units connected  to each serial port  polling intervals  point definitions  networking parameters and more   System configuration is done using a set of configuration utilities  all of which are  based on a consistent  user friendly GUI  This chapter illustrates the MACS configura   tion process  and shows how to configure commonly used MACS modules For details  on the equipment specific configuration  consult the equipment
183. mage Video Monitor Configuration  IPG Quality Control Configuration  Liebert RCM8 Configuration  MACS 10 Configuration   MAPI Configuration    Monitor Confiauration Ei    Cancel                     Select Display Editor and click on the Open push button  or simply double click on the  Display Editor name  The main Display Editor dialog box will pop up on the screen     230 Micus Alarm and Control System    Eile View Bitmaps EnumeratedSets Actions Help    Creating Custom Screens       SR Sieg 2              Source   10 POINTS      Server   Unit   Point        Type   r Colors  Active Above  favs 481 ALARM OFF z   Inactive Within  Ja 481 ALARM OFF z   Pulsed Below  favs 481 ALARM OFF z   Show State  Jang  gt     r Display Styles  I Read Only Scientific                m Point Attributes  xf  el ul wl   Options     Mal    Name  Min  Add   Delete   Modify   Save    E d E                         The Display Editor main dialog box has the following layout     Menu bar  Toolbar    Point selection    Colors    Display styles    provides access to the editing commands from the pull down  menus containing editing commands     provides access to the frequently used editing commands by  clicking on the toolbar push buttons     group of four combo boxes allows you to select the server  unit   slot and point ID for the point that you want to add to your custom  screen     group box contains a group of four combo boxes that allow you to  select the color to use when displaying point status  I
184. mbi   nation of inputs and outputs that suits best your needs  Up to four slots in the MACS  server chassis can be populated with MACS IO plug in boards  There are several  different boards that you can order  which provide the following IO combinations     e 8 opto isolated inputs and 8 mechanical relays   e 16 opto isolated inputs and 16 mechanical relays     e 32 REED relays     70 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Based on its configuration  the system will dynamically create an appropriate MACS IO  monitor for each slot  If more than one slot is used for MACS IO  the system will first  prompt you to select the slot you are interested in  and then open the appropriate  monitor for that slot     To open a MACS IO monitor  you need to select MACS IO as the type of equipment  you want to monitor and then select the unit  There is always at most one MACS IO  unit in each server  Each unit may have up to four slots  When you select the unit  the  system dynamically checks if there is more than one slot  and if so  displays an interim  screen from which you select the slot  If there is only one slot  the system creates an  appropriate monitor window for that slot and displays it on the screen     To open a MACS IO monitor  click the Monitor pull down menu and select the  Equipment Specific Monitors menu item     d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager Event Log View Archive Configuration Help  es Connect       Discon
185. me period in a scrollable list box  Each  file is displayed with a checkbox  indicating whether to copy this file or not  Initially  all  checkboxes are checked  You can uncheck those files that you don   t want to copy     Once you select your log files  you need to select a destination directory  The desti   nation directory tree control initially shows all disk drives on your computer  When you  click on a particular drive  the program will open it and show the folders you have  By  clicking on folders  you can select subfolders until you reach your destination folder     Searching the entire network can be a time consuming process  For this reason the  program does not initially show your network resources  If you want to copy your log  files to another computer  click on the Network button  The control will display other  Windows NT workstations on your Microsoft Network  Click on the computer of your  choice and select a disk drive and a folder  To start copying files  click on the Copy  button  You can stop the process by clicking on the Stop button     To open the Copy Event Log dialog box  click on Archive   gt  Copy Event Log    90 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands       i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1    Jog    Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager Evert Log View Archive Configuration Help       Copy Event Log     Copy Equipment Log          Slsgp Ries Aldi oi 2     Delete Event Log     Delete Equipment Log       If your system is configured 
186. ment specific status monitors    The Equipment Selection dialog box has the following layout     Micus Alarm and Control System 67    Commands             Equipment Selection  Equipment Type  Unit Name   COMSTREAM TORONTO  e  cra  NUCLEUS   MONTREAL  RMS 3  SENTRY       Cancel                   Equipment Type list box contains a list of all equipment types being monitored by  your MACS  To select the equipment type  click on the appropri   ate name in the list  When you select the equipment  the system  will display a list of all units of the selected equipment type in the  Unit Name list     Unit Name list box contains a list of all units of the selected equipment type   The list changes as you select different equipment types from the  Equipment Type list    Select push button opens the equipment specific monitor for the  selected equipment unit     The following picture depicts a typical equipment specific monitor  It shows a Site  Sentry  unit named TORONTO SS2 equipped with some 10162P input modules  016  output modules  RS2A serial port module and AN846 analog module        4  Site Sentry is a programmable logic controller manufactured by Electralert Ltd  Site Sentry units are typically  used to monitor and control remote sites     68 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    The equipment specific monitor knows the equipment and draws the equipment slots  and points based on the information found in the configuration database  In this  example  the monitor shows al
187. merated Sets    To present an analog input or analog output point using enumerated sets  you have to  select which enumerated set to use for the selected point     When adding an analog input or output point to your custom screen  select one of the  enumerated point styles  shown in Selecting Display Styles  earlier in this manual     Display Styles    Read Only   Scientific       Om     i  li       to CW D m   gt   gt   gt   gt            o E EI Les      ES         4         0 Y aL   la              8  a    Point Attributes   x  fo v   0 H   0 w   o   Options   ENUMERATED SET    Max    0 00  Name  O   Min   0 00    Save            In the example above  the red triangle shows the currently selected display style   which is a box that displays enumerated point descriptions  When you click on that  display style  the Options field in the Point Attributes will show ENUMERATED SET   Next  select the enumerated set you want to apply to the selected point and click on  the Add push button     270 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 10 Using Actions    The MACS GUI allows you to start other programs from your custom screens  by  clicking on the action push buttons  You can insert action push buttons into your  custom screens  and link them to third party programs  such as FTP or Telnet  You  can also run programs such as Acrobat Reader or Microsoft Word to view on line  documentation  You can execute equipment specific programs and tools supplied by  the h
188. ms   gt  MACS   gt PagerCfg        8  Some network administrators do not want to make configuration utilities accessible to all users  In such cases   these utilities are installed only on the workstations used by the system administrators  Others prefer to make  configuration programs accessible from the MACS main user interface  The choice is yours  and the way you  access configuration utilities is a field configurable option     142 Micus Alarm and Control System       f Internet  Internet Explorer  E mail  Outlook Express    Spider Solitaire    IPGGUI    MacsMenu    Paint    Data Sources  ODBC       Berahap ae          start      Set Program Access and Defaults    W Windows Catalog        Windows Update   AOL For Broadband      Launch RealOne Player   CD winzip     Accessories     Games   mi PrintMe Internet Printing   H ap 650_651_M650_M652_740  EH Soundmax     Startup   yy Adobe Reader 6 0   E Internet Explorer    mei MSN Explorer    GQ  Outlook Express   s Remote Assistance     Windows Media Player    we    Windows Messenger    fm MACS     M  Microsoft Developer Network  EH Microsoft Visual C   6 0    H Real   EH winzip   Ki MSN Messenger 6 0  Q  RealOne Player       73S SSS SS Se SS       ke  SH        Logoff  0  Turn Off Computer    Configuration    ColorCfg  DemoCfg  IPGCFg  IPGGUI  LogCfg  MacsEditor  MacsManager  MacsMenu  MacsUtl  Mapicfg  Menucfg  PagerCfg    Location  C  MA amp CS Programs     2 2 5 58 Pm    If your system is configured to provide access to th
189. n addition  it  also allows you to select which point state to display while design   ing your screen     group box shows all display styles that can be used when drawing  the currently selected point in your custom screen  As you change    Micus Alarm and Control System 231    Creating Custom Screens    your point selection from digital inputs to digital outputs or analog  inputs  the contents of this box will change to present styles appli   cable to the selected point type     Point attributes group box allows you to specify or manually adjust point coordi   nates and size  orientation on screen  thickness of lines  action to  take when point is clicked  and other attributes  The exact func   tions of the fields in this group will change depending on the  selected point type and display style     Add push button allows you to add a new point to your custom screen    Delete push button allows you to delete an existing point from your cus   tom screen    Modify push button allows you to modify the attributes of a point already    included in your custom screen     Save push button allows you to save your custom screen configuration  into the database     8 6 Creating Custom Screen    To create a new screen  you have to   e Create a background image  e Add your screen to the list of custom screens    Once these initial steps are completed  you can proceed by adding points to your  screen  After you create your screen  you can always open it to modify the screen  contents and 
190. n edit box allows you to enter the description used when displaying  the enumerated value  The short description is limited to 15 char   acters     Long Description edit box allows you to enter a more verbose description of the  enumerated value  This description is limited to 64 characters  If  supported by the associated MACS equipment module  this text is  included in an event report issued by the equipment module when  the point takes the associated numerical value     OK push button adds a new enumerated value to the selected enu   merated set and closes the dialog box    Cancel push button closes the dialog box without adding a new enumer   ated value     Micus Alarm and Control System 267    Creating Custom Screens    8 9 2 2 Configure Enumerated Value    To modify an existing enumerated value  open the Select Enumerated Value dialog  box  highlight the value you are interested in and click on the Configure Value push  button  The Configure Enumerated Value dialog box will pop up on the screen  This  dialog box layout and operation is the same as the Add Enumerated Value dialog box   described in the last section     8 9 2 3 Delete Enumerated Value    To delete an existing enumerated value from the selected enumerated set  open the  Select Enumerated Value dialog box  highlight the value that you want to delete and  click on the Delete Value push button  The following message box will pop up on the  screen        Select Enumerated Value       Pi   re you sure you want 
191. n menu selection to  exit the application     menu contains commands used to connect to and to disconnect  from the MACS server  commands to invoke user defined monitor  windows  equipment specific monitor windows  command to  select MACS node  and command line mode of operation     menu contains a command to lock and unlock individual pieces of  equipment    menu contains a command to manually compose and send a  pager message     menu contains commands used to view the event log and the  equipment log files     menu contains a command to show or hide the toolbar and status  bar     menu contains commands to copy and delete event log and  equipment log files     menu contains a command to select and launch MACS configura   tion utilities     menu contains a standard Windows command to display the  application About box  and a command to open the on line copy  of the MACS User   s Manual  which is this book     The following pages list all commands grouped into their respective selection menus     Micus Alarm and Control System 55    Commands    6 1 Connecting to MACS    In order to receive alarms  and to monitor and control your equipment using graphical  screens  you must connect to the MACS server  To inform the server not to send  events to your GUI  you must disconnect from the server     Connecting and disconnecting is usually done automatically  That is  when you start  your GUI  it connects to the server all by itself  When you click on the button to exit  the  GUI di
192. n you add a destination to the Selected Recipients list  make sure that the corre   sponding service is actually running at the specified location on your network  If the  service is not running  your MAPI interface will attempt to connect to this service on  each event report  and time out after several seconds  This delay will severely impede  the overall MACS performance  If you decide not to use a particular event report  recipient for a period of time  make sure to take it off of the Selected Recipients list   and to restart your MAPI interface program     7 5 6 MAPI Message Recipients    Once you define your MAPI interfaces  you need to define a list of MAPI message  recipients for each MAPI interface  Typically  MACS uses only a single MAPI  interface  To add individual recipients to your MAPI interface configuration  you need  to     e Add the recipient name and address      Define a list of all event reports to be sent as pager messages  to that recipient    To manage your MAPI interface recipients you will use the MAPI Users dialog box  To  open it  select the interface name in the MAPI Configuration utility main dialog box   and click on the MAPI Users push button        1  When configuring your MAPI interface  you have to define a list of all possible event reports that might be sent  to the user as pager messages  Any given message from the list will be sent to the user only if and when the cor   responding event happens     178 Micus Alarm and Control System    
193. nd user     Field configurable status or alarm points allow end users to define point name   text  severity  and color for each status or alarm point state     Field configurable control points allow end users to define point name  text   severity  and color for each control point state  Control points can be set  reset   pulsed or toggled from the user defined control screens     Command line mode of operation is provided for the equipment  which supports  commands from the terminal     The system always shows up to 100 most recent events in a scrollable window     All reported events are saved in the text and or binary files created on a daily basis   The system provides means to view  search  copy and print the event log     Introduction    e Paging system automatically calls all personnel responsible for the equipment     e The system automatically sends e mail or fax messages to the predefined list of  users     e The system automatically creates trouble tickets when equipment failure is  detected     e Multi user support allows operators on the network to access the system indepen   dently and simultaneously     e Equipment locking prevents conflicting commands in the multi user environment     e Access is available over the LAN  dial up and ISDN networking  using the TCP IP  protocol     e On line MACS documentation     e On line equipment documentation     3 4 How does it work     Your MACS is a distributed client server application  This means that it may use more  t
194. nect     EAE   E KA    Command Line      Status Monitor      Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node           Alternatively  click on the corresponding toolbar icon depicted in the picture below       Equipment specific status monitors    The Equipment Selection dialog box has the following layout     Micus Alarm and Control System 71    Commands    Equipment Selection    Equipment Type  Unit Name   MACS IO          CTKIUT DA    Cancel      If there is more than one MACS server in your system  you will see more than one  MACS IO unit on the list  When you click on the Select push button  the system will  determine whether the selected unit consists of more than one slot  For a single slot  it  will open an appropriate window right away  If there is more than one slot  the system  will display a window from which you can select the slot you are interested in                          EB MACS 10 UO Plug In Board Selection    Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS     Slots     1_  pcroios__    4 _  PCr32REL                   72 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Depending on the selected slot type  you will see one of the windows described on the  following pages     Various MACS IO slots offer several combinations of inputs and output points  or  output REED relays only  The input points have two states  active and inactive  While  monitoring the equipment  you can only refresh the operational status of these points     The output points are either mechanical or REED
195. nect to this service on each  event report  and time out after several seconds  This delay will severely impede the  overall MACS performance  If you decide not to use a particular event report recipient  for a period of time  make sure to take it off of the Selected Recipients list  and to  restart your Event Logger Windows NT service     7 2 5 View Event Logger    To view your Event Logger present configuration  select your event longer from the  list in the Event Log Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the View Server  push button     The system will create a report and present it as a text file using the WordPad text  editor  Using the editor  you can save the report in a file  print it  cut and paste the text  and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The report layout is depicted in the  following picture                Event Logger Configuration   Notepad BAX  File Edit Format View Help   Berver name  LOGGER   Server ID  2   Computer name  DOSITEJ    Protocol port  4448  Text event log  D i Macs Tog  ascii    Event reporting     DOSITEJ  4464             beo    130 Micus Alarm and Control System          Configuration    7 3 Graphical User Interface Configuration    In order to display event reports  update graphical images and execute operator  commands  MACS Graphical User Interface  GUI  must login into the MACS system   To log in  the GUI establishes a network connection with the MACS event logger and  requests that the event logger forwards a
196. ners or cameras  and variety of software packages to create or  modify your images     254 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    We suggest that you keep all of your graphical images in a dedicated folder  By  convention  MACS database and bitmap files are kept in the MACS Config folder     8 8 2 Managing Bitmaps    Once you create bitmap files  you need to add them to the list of files Known to the  system  You can always add files  modify their names and locations  and delete them  from the list     You will manage bitmap files from the Display Editor  using the Manage Bitmaps  dialog box  To open it  click on the Bitmaps   gt  Manage Bitmaps in the editor main  menu       gt  MACS Display Editor Version 3 0  File view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help    Select Bitmaps      Manage Bitmaps           The Manage Bitmaps dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the  following layout           Manage Bitmaps  24 Bits Light Configure Bitmap     Amber Light   Big Amber Light     Big Green Light Add Bitmap     Big Red Light     Closed Fridge Delete Bitmap      Green Light    Open Fridge View Bimaps e   Red Light View Bitmaps       Exit                     Micus Alarm and Control System 255    Creating Custom Screens    On the left hand side  the dialog box shows a scrollable list of all presently configured  bitmap images  Note that the list contains symbolic names assigned to your images   rather than the exact file names  You will associ
197. nfiguration are presented on the following  pages     pull down list allows you to select a physical slot in the computer  chassis for the slot  The valid range is from 1 to 4  These num   bers just refer to the board number one  board number two  and  so on  They dont have to correspond to the PCI slot numbers on  the computer motherboard  The list contains only those numbers  within the range that are not already assigned     field contains a logical unit number of the plug in board used by  the Windows device driver  Logical unit numbers are hardware  and device driver specific  and should be changed only by the    qualified personnel           1  Usually  MACS IO plug in boards and their device drivers are installed by Micus Real Time Software Inc  per   sonnel and should not be changed in the field     198    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Save push button saves the slot configuration and closes the dialog  box    Quit push button closes the dialog box without saving the configuration  changes     7 6 6 2 Modify Slot    To change an existing slot configuration  use the Configure Slot dialog box  To select  the slot  highlight its name in the Slot Configuration dialog box and click on the  Configure Slot push button     The layout and operation of the Configure Slot dialog box is the same as the Add Slot  dialog box  described on the previous pages     7 6 6 3 Delete Slot    To delete a slot from the selected MACS IO module configuration  highlight the
198. ng action name and the associated    command   Add Action allows you to add a new action to your system configuration   Delete Action allows you to delete an existing action from your system configu   ration   View Actions allows you to create and view a text report that contains a list of    all configured actions   Exit closes the Manage Actions dialog box     272 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 10 1 1 Add Action    To add a new action to your system configuration  open the Manage Actions dialog  box and click on the Add Action push button  The Edit Action dialog box will pop up on    the screen           Edit Action       Command              ID   0  Name              The Edit Action dialog box consists of the following     ID  Name    Command    Save    Cancel    read only field contains the action database identifier     edit box allows you to specify the name for the action  The name  can be up to 15 characters long  and does not have to be the  same as the command name  Typically  you will use a descriptive  name that indicates the target of an action  rather than the tools  used to accomplish it  e g  User   s Manual rather than Acrobat  Reader      edit box allows you to enter the complete command to execute   You may need to include drive letter and folder names or fully  qualified network path for the programs that you want to invoke   and fully qualified paths for the files included in the command  argument list  If file names includ
199. nitor Equipment Locking Pager   Evert Log View Archive Configuration Help    View Event Log       JOE       Slsle   Elend Ale    View Equipment Log    Micus Alarm and Control System    83    Commands    Alternatively  you can click on the appropriate toolbar icon depicted in the following  picture     Al View equipment log    When you enter the View Equipment Log command  the system will prompt you to  select the unit for which you want to examine the equipment log              Equipment Selection  Equipment Type  Unit Name   COMSTREAM  IV CTRL PANEL TORONTO  IV MONITOR OTTAWA  NUCLEUS    o MONTREAL  RMS 3  SENTRY       The Equipment Selection dialog box has the following layout                    Equipment Type scrollable list contains the names of all equipment types   Remember that the equipment log is maintained only for some  equipment  If you select the equipment for which there is no  equipment log  the system will not find any equipment log files     When you select the equipment type  the system will display the  names of all units of that type in the Unit Name list     Unit Name scrollable list contains the names of all units of the selected  equipment type  As you change your equipment type selection   the list of unit names is updated accordingly     84 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Select push button confirms your equipment unit selection and closes  the window   Cancel push button allows you to exit the View Equipment Log command    without selec
200. nput or output is  selected     pull down list allows you to link your current custom screen with  the next custom screen  When you create a Summary point  you  can draw it using a display style with a push button  Then  you can  configure that push button to open the next custom screen     When you configure your summary point  use the Options field to  select the NEXT MONITOR option  Then  use the Name field to  select the next screen to open  Custom screens are selected by  name     push button allows you to add a new point to your current custom  screen  displayed in the Display Editor working area     To permanently add a point to your database  you must click on  the Save push button     push button allows you to delete the selected point from your cur   rent custom screen  To select a point  just click the left mouse but   ton on the drawing in the Display Editor working area     To permanently delete a point from your database  you must click  on the Save push button     push button allows you to modify the selected point display style   coordinates  size and colors  To select a point  just click the left  mouse button on the drawing in the Display Editor working area   After you change the selected point appearance and attributes   click on the Modify push button     To permanently modify the selected point attributes in the data   base  you must click on the Save push button     push button saves your current custom screen in the database     Micus Alarm and Control
201. nt  In addition  MACS will display a text message each  time an output relay is pulsed     The MACS IO Digital Output Point Definition dialog box has the following layout        Digital Output Point Definition    Name  DUT   Address   64    Active    Text  ACTIVE  Color   YELLOW ON BRIGHT RED D  Severity    CRITICAL D   Page    Inactive    Text  INACTIVE  Color   YELLOW ON GREEN D  Severity   WARNING E   Page    Pulsed    Text  PULSED    Color   YELLOW ON DARK BLUE X  Severity   WARNING   f Page    Save   Delete                           Micus Alarm and Control System 209    Configuration    This dialog box allows you to define the event report text  color combination and  severity to use when reporting that the point has changed its state or that the point  was pulsed  You can also define whether to send a pager message when a state  transition or pulse is detected     The dialog box consists of the following elements     Name  Active    Active Text    Active Color    Active Severity  Page  Inactive    Inactive Text    Inactive Color    Inactive Severity  Page    Pulsed    210    field contains the output point name  You can use up to 15 char   acter long names  which can include spaces     group of controls allows you to define the text  color combination   severity and paging to use when the point becomes active     edit box allows you to enter the text to include in the event report  issued when the point becomes active  If you leave this field  blank  no event report wil
202. nt reports  Typically   the list will contain only your event logger     Add push button allows you to add a new event report recipient to the  Selected Recipients list  To add a new recipient  select it from the  MACS Recipients list  or enter the computer name and the proto   col port manually  Then click on the Add push button     Delete push button allows you to delete an entry from the Selected  Recipients list  To delete a recipient  highlight it in the Selected  Recipients list and click the Delete push button     Exit push button closes the Event Reporting dialog box     Please Note  When you add a destination to the Selected Recipients list  make sure  that the corresponding service is actually running at the specified location on your  network  If the service is not running  the MACS IO service will attempt to connect to  the destination service on each event report  and time out after several seconds  This  delay will severely impede the overall MACS performance  If you decide not to use a  particular event report recipient for a period of time  make sure to take it off of the  Selected Recipients list  and to restart your MACS IO windows NT service     7 6 6 Slot Configuration    The MACS server is a rack mounted computer with four internal slots in which you  can install a variety of MACS IO plug in boards  Each MACS IO board provides a  different input and output combination  For example  the PCI DIO8 board has 8 digital  inputs and 8 electromechanical relays  t
203. ntains the program name and current revision  number  On the right side  it contains push buttons to minimize  and maximize the window  and to exit the application     Micus Alarm and Control System 49    Getting Started    Menu Bar allows you to access all available dialog boxes and commands  through a set of pull down selection menus     Toolbar allows you to access frequently used dialog boxes and com   mands by clicking on the toolbar icons     Event Reports displays up to the 100 most recent events in the main window  working area  You can scroll the window up  down  left and right  to view the event reports     Status Bar shows a brief single line help message  which explains the usage  of the main window item currently being pointed to by the mouse     Horizontal Scroll Bar allows you to scroll horizontally through the contents of the main  window working area    Vertical Scroll Bar allows you to scroll vertically through the contents of the main  window working area    5 3 1 Toolbar Icons    The Toolbar allows you to quickly access the most frequently used commands by  clicking the mouse on the appropriate toolbar icon  The toolbar is depicted in the fol   lowing picture     ip Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX       Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Yiew Archive Configuration Help    zaa a mm Aldi oi   el       The icons used in the toolbar are     z  Connects the GUI to the server    zl Disconnects the GUI from the server    50 Micus Alarm
204. nts can be set to a fixed set of  values  These values can be mapped into a list of  names  For example  TV channel numbers can be  Space mapped into the corresponding TV channel names  In       Family Channel e S   Showcase such a case  instead of entering numbers  the values  can be selected from a drop down list of the associated  names     Micus Alarm and Control System 23    Overview       To monitor analog values over time  points may be pre   sented using scrolling graphs  Each time a new analog  value is sampled  it gets added to the right end of the  graph  Once the end of the working rectangle is reached   the graph starts scrolling to the left     Analog values below lower threshold  within limits and  above upper threshold may be represented using differ   ent colors     Two scrolling graph styles are available  a transparent  graph style and a solid graph style     You can define the length and width of the graph in pix   els  One vertical line is added to the graph each time a  new value is received  Thus  the scrolling speed of the  graph depends on its width in pixels  and the polling  interval used to sample the value     The system allows the end users to nest any number of windows they create into a  logical chain  For example  the top level window may contain a geographical map with  the regional centers  By clicking on the regional center  the operator opens the next  window with the regional map  which contains sites  Clicking on a given site opens a  bu
205. nual to automatic using the Windows  NT Services manager     40 Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started    Typically  you would start the MACS event logger service first  followed by other  equipment modules  That way  all event reports will be properly saved into the event  log file     5 1 1 1 Windows XP    To start your MACS equipment module manually under Windows XP  login to your  MACS server  Then open the Control Panel by clicking on Start   gt  Control Panel  In  the Control Panel doubleclick on the Administrative Tools icon  When you open the  Administrative Tools dialog box  doubleclick on the Services icon                          8 Internet K   My Documents     Internet Explorer      4  My Recent Documents  gt   ea E mail E Li  Outlook Express    g e Vi My Pictures    Spider Solitaire 2 My Music    IPGGUI ra My Computer    a  My Network Places      gt  Control Panel    Notepad Set Prog  Defaults  Provides options for you to customize the appearance and functionality of your  computer  add or remove programs  and set up network connections and user  WordPad Connect  accounts     k 2 Printers and Faxes    IPGCfg    MacsMenu    2  Help and Support     Search    Microsoft Visual C   6 0 I  Run       B SNES aeg      R Command Prompt    All Programs  gt         Log Off g Turn Off Computer  WM Start xP Service   Paint   G Control Panel       Lin 3 51PM       Micus Alarm and Control System 41    Getting Started    In the Windows XP services manager highlight the
206. o Server Configuration  Ca  Display Editor   DSR 4800 Configuration    Event Log Configuration     File Copy Configuration   GI Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration   IPG Quality Control Configuration   Liebert RCM8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration     MPEG Monitor Confiauration bs    Cancel                        Select the User Interface Configuration and click on the Open push button  or simply  doubleclick on the User Interface Configuration name  The main User Interface  Configuration dialog box will pop up on the screen     The dialog box layout consists of two list boxes and the push buttons used to add   modify  delete and view entries and to exit the configuration program     The list box on the left hand side of the dialog box contains the names of all worksta   tions that have access to the MACS  You can add new workstations to that list to allow  their users to access the MACS  or you can delete the existing to deny access to the  MACS     Micus Alarm and Control System 133    Configuration    When you select a workstation name in the list  the list box on the right hand side of  the dialog box will show all event loggers to which the selected workstation has  access to  Typically  all workstations will have access to a single event logger   However  in the multi server MACS configurations  you may see more than one entry  in the right hand side list box        H  ae      MACS User Interface Configura
207. o add a new service to your pager configuration  click on the Add Service button in  the Pager Service Selection dialog box  The Add Service dialog box will pop up on the  screen  The dialog box has the following layout     Name    Service ID    Serial Port    Polling Interval    156       Add Service          Name       Service ID  H    Serial Pott   wl  Polling Interval  oO o  Password    s   Phone  DES    e                     edit box allows you to type in the name of your pager service   Usually  this is the name of your service provider  such as Bell  Mobility or PageMart     read only field contains a numerical value which is used internally  within the MACS configuration database to identify the service   This number is automatically assigned  and you cannot change it     pull down list allows you to select the serial port to use to dial the  service provider telephone number     edit box allows you to specify the pager service polling interval in  seconds  To optimize its operation  the pager does not send indi   vidual page messages as it receives event reports  Instead  the  pager forms a queue of all page messages to send  and sends all  pending page messages in a single telephone call when the poll   ing interval expires     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Selecting the right polling interval for your system greatly affects  pager performance  There is no point in specifying less than 30  seconds  if the modem needs more than that just to dial 
208. odify configuration of an already configured event  logger     allows you to add a new event logger to your system configura   tion     allows you to delete an existing event logger from your system  configuration     allows you to specify computers and programs on your network  that will receive event reports from the event logger being config   ured     allows you to create a text report that contains event logger   s  present configuration     exits the Event Log Configuration utility     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 2 1 Add Event Logger    When you run the Event Log Configuration utility for the first time  the list of existing  event loggers will be empty  and you will have to add a new event logger to your  system configuration     To add a new event logger  click on the Add Server button in the Event Log Configu   ration main dialog box  and the Add Event Log Server dialog box will appear           Add Event Log Server    Server name   Computer name   Protocol port  0    Text Event Log    l Text log path        Binary Event Log    Binary log path                    Cancel          The Add Event Log Server dialog box has the following layout     Server name edit box allows you to specify the name of your event logger  This  name will appear in all event reports originated by the event log   ger     The name you select must be the same as the name you speci   fied while installing the event logger Windows NT service  The  event logger Windows NT s
209. oduct     edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  which will contain the event log binary files     The path you use to access your event log files may take one of the following two    forms     e lf you run your MACS on a single workstation  you could specify the path such as  C  MACS Log  Make sure that the folder you specify exists  and that MACS  programs have full access rights to that folder     e If you use your MACS in a multiuser environment  in which you want to access  your event log from other workstations on the network  you must specify a fully  qualified network path to your event log folder  For example  if the MACS server  name is PLATO  you path could be  IPLATO MACSI Log  In such cases  make  sure that the MACS folder is a shared network resource  and that MACS programs  have full access to that folder     When you use a fully qualified network path  you have to make sure that your MACS  services run from an account that have access to the network resources  By default        5  The binary event log is intended for the trend analysis  graphing analog processes and other functions  These  tools will be offered by Micus Real Time Software Inc  with part of future releases of the MACS product     122    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    MACS services run under the Windows NT system account Local System  with inter   action with desktop enabled  This account is appropriate if you use MACS on a single  computer  Ho
210. of deleting equipment log  files     graphically indicates the progress deleting the selected equip   ment log files     Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 10 Configuration    Your MACS is a highly modular system  You can pick and chose the equipment  modules that you need to support your own equipment  You can also select a number  of optional components  such as paging  e mail  trouble ticketing and others  Each of  these modules comes with a configuration utility program specifically designed for that  module     To hide the complexity of so many different programs  MACS presents all of them ina  list of configuration utilities and provides a dialog box that allows you to select and  launch the utility you need  As a result  you will perceive MACS configuration utilities  as an integral part of the main user interface program  and you will not be even aware  that you are actually using a separate program     6 10 1 Select Utility    To launch a configuration utility  click on the Configuration pull down menu and select  Select Utility      7 Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX  Fie Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Yiew Archive Configuration Help    a Select Utility       aa   SE S a  Em GG       g  Options        Alternatively  you can click on the appropriate toolbar icon depicted in the following  picture             Select MACS configuration utility    The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of c
211. og box  without deleting the node  click on the No push button     7 3 5 4 View MACS Nodes    To view your present MACS nodes configuration  open the MACS Node Selection  dialog box and click on the View Nodes push button     The system will create a report and present it as a text file using the WordPad text  editor  Using the editor  you can save the report in a file  print it  cut and paste the text   and perform other functions typical of WordPad  The report layout is depicted in the  following picture            MACS GUIs Configuration Report txt   WordPad BAX  File Edit view Insert Format Help  Ce SRA Sen B    ID Event Source Connect On Startup GUI Host Server Host Server Port                d LOGGER YES DOSITEJ DOSITEJ 4448  2 LOGGER YES PUPIN DOSITEJ 4448  3 SENTRY NO DOSITEJ DOSITEJ 4448  4 Macs DEMO NO DOSITEJ DOSITEJ 4448  5 LOGGER YES KAVERA KAVERA 4448  6 LOGGER YES NTL NTL 4448  ji LOGGER YES ICIUS IciIus 4445  8 LOGGER YES Macs Macs 4448  9 LOGGER YES RASTKO DOSITEJ 4448  10 LOGGER YES VUK DOSITEJ 4445  12 LOGGER YES DOSITEJ VUK 4000             For Help  press F1    Micus Alarm and Control System 141    Configuration    7 4 Pager Configuration    The MACS Pager System is an optional add on component  that sends the same  alarm messages displayed on the MACS GUI screens to one or more alphanumeric  pagers  Based on the event being reported  the pager service selects from the  database a list of personnel responsible for that event  and sends pager messages to  
212. ollowing pages     push button allows you to delete a pager message assigned to  the selected user  To delete a message  highlight it in the top list  box and click on the Delete button     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Add push button allows you to add new pager messages to the  selected user  To add a message  highlight it in the bottom list  box  and click on the Add push button  Note that the bottom list  box accepts multiple selections  By clicking on several lines at a  time  you can add all of them at once  The lines you select do not  have to be adjacent  To de select a line  click on it again     7 4 8 2 Event Details    The Pager Messages dialog box  described on the previous pages  contains a list of  messages assigned to the selected user  and a list of all pager events  In both of these  lists  events that can be sent as pager messages are displayed using their respective  server  unit  slot and point names  To see the text assigned to each point state   highlight the event in the list and click on the respective Details push button  The  Pager Event Details dialog box will pop up  This read only dialog box has the layout  depicted in the following picture        Pager Event Details       Point Identification    Server name   DSA 4800    TEST IRD  Unit name     Slot name   Point name   COMMUNICATION    Pager Messages  Page    Active above limits text   COMMUNICATION WITH TEST IRD LOST IV    Inactive within limits test   COMMUNICATION WITH TES
213. om Screen    Screen name     Database ID  H    Bitmap file   Cancel                            Screen name edit box allows you to enter your custom screen name  This name  will appear in the list of custom status and control windows in the  MACS main GUI    Database ID read only box shows the database ID associated with the screen    Bitmap file edit box allows you to specify the path to the bitmap file associ   ated with the custom screen    Save push button adds the custom screen to the database    Cancel push button closes the dialog box without adding the custom    screen to the database     8 6 2 2 Modify Custom Screen    To modify the data of an existing custom screen  highlight it in the list and click on the  Modify push button  The Modify Custom Screen dialog box will pop up on the screen   This dialog box has the same layout and as the Add Custom Screen  described above     8 6 2 3 Delete Custom Screen    To delete an existing custom screen  highlight its name in the Monitor Configuration  dialog box list and click on the Delete push button     The following dialog box will pop up     Micus Alarm and Control System 235    Creating Custom Screens    Custom Screen Configuration             A Are you sure you want to delete this screen              To delete the selected custom screen  click on the Yes push button  To exit the dialog  box without deleting the screen  click on the No push button     8 6 3 View Custom Screens    To create a report that contains a list of
214. om the colors you  specify for your event reports  shown in the MACS main GUI in text format  Using the  MACS ColorCfg configuration utility  you can define as many colors as you want for  your graphical images  Once the colors are defined in the database  you can pick the  colors you want to use for the selected point from the pull down lists depicted in the    following picture     Active Above       Colors    Active Above   DEFAULT CRITICAL   sl  Inactive Within   DEFAULT MINOR    Pulsed Below   veLLow ON DARK BLUI DI  Show State  Ian   m             pull down list allows you to select the color to use when displaying  the digital inputs or outputs in the active state  or when displaying  the analog points with the their value above the upper threshold     Micus Alarm and Control System 239    Creating Custom Screens    Inactive Within    Pulsed Below    Show State    pull down list allows you to select the color to use when display   ing the digital inputs or outputs in inactive state  or when display   ing the analog points with their value within limits     pull down list allows you to select the color to use when display   ing the pulsed digital outputs  or when displaying the analog  points with their value below the lower threshold     pull down list allows you to select which state to display for the  points shown in the working area of the Display Editor window   By changing the current state  you can check the appearance of  the displayed points     For the digita
215. onfigsLook_Network_Ont bmp   Montreal Site  WDOSITEJ Dosite  DX MACS  Config Bell_mon bmp   MPEG Test  WDOSITEJ Dositej D MACS  Config MPEG_Test bmp v     Delete Add Modify View Exit             Monitor list    Open    Delete    Add  Modify  View    Exit    234    contains a list of all presently configured custom monitor and con   trol screens  Custom screens are presented using their names  and fully qualified paths to their respective background image bit   map files     push button allows you to open the selected custom screen for  editing  To open an existing custom screen  highlight it in the list  and click on the Open push button  or simply double click on the  custom screen name     push button allows you to delete the selected custom screen from  the database  This operation does not delete your background  image file     push button allows you to add a new custom screen to your data   base     push button allows you to modify an existing custom screen  name or path to the associated bitmap file     push button allows you to create a report that contains a list of all  of your custom monitor and control screens     push button closes the dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 6 2 1 Add Custom Screen    To add a new custom screen to the list of your monitor and control windows  click on  the Add push button  The Add Custom Screen dialog box will pop up on the screen   This dialog box has the following layout        E    Add Cust
216. onfigu   ration utilities     Micus Alarm and Control System 103    Commands          Configuration Utilities  Color Definitions a  Demo Server Configuration  Display Editor    DSR 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration   File Copy Configuration   Gl Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration  IPG Quality Control Configuration  Liebert RCM8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration   MPEG Monitor Confiauration K      Cancel                   The Configuration Utilities dialog box has the following layout     List of Utilities scrollable list box contains descriptive names of all MACS config   uration utilities available from your GUI    To launch the utility that  you need  highlight the utility name and click on the Open push  button  or simply doubleclick on the utility name     Open push button actually launches the utility highlighted in the List of  Utilities    Cancel push button closes the dialog box without launching any configu   ration utility     Instructions on how to use some of the common configuration utilities are described in  the Configuration chapter of this book  Configuration specific to the individual  equipment modules is documented in the supplement manuals that come with each  equipment module        6  Your system administrator may decide not to provide all of these utilities to all users  In such case  only a subset  of utilities will appear on the list  if any     104 Micus Alarm and Control Sy
217. or and close the Foreground Color dialog box   the preview box will display the color description using the newly  selected foreground color     is a push button that opens a standard Windows dialog box to  select colors  described on the previous pages  When you select  the background color and close the Background Color dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    the preview box will display the color description using the newly  selected background color     Preview Box shows you the new foreground and background color combina   tion  and blinking     OK push button saves the new color definition and closes the Add  Color dialog box     Cancel push button closes the Add Color dialog box without saving the  new color definition     An example of a new color definition is shown in the following picture           Modify Color  Description  BLINKING RED   Iw Blinking    Foreground Background    Cancel                   To save the new color definition  click on the OK push button  To exit the dialog box  without creating a new color definition  click on Cancel     7 1 5 Modify Color    To add an existing color definition  select the color description and click on the Modify  push button in the main dialog box  The Modify Color dialog box has the same layout  as the Add Color dialog box described on the previous pages     Micus Alarm and Control System 113    Configuration    7 1 6 Delete Colors    To delete an existing color definition  select it from the
218. ou will  find one equipment module for each type of equipment attached  to your system  The equipment module names are shown with  the MS Windows console program icon     38 Micus Alarm and Control System    Getting Started    The  MACS Programs folder will contain one configuration utility and one equipment  module for each type of equipment attached to the system  In addition  the folder will  also contain some programs which are commonly used in any MACS installation     MacsMenu exe    is the main graphical user interface to the system  It displays  alarms and graphical images     Macs TicketMenu exe    MacsManager exe    MenuCfg exe    ColorCfg exe  LogCfg exe   PagerCfg exe  MAPICfg exe    MacsUtl exe    MacsEditor exe    MacsMon exe    is a user interface program that allows you to access the optional  trouble ticketing system  You will use this program to examine  open trouble tickets  to assign technician to do the repairs  to  enter the status of the trouble tickets assigned to you  to create  reports  and to do other tasks     is a user interface program used to start the MACS messaging   MAPI  programs  This program is usually used only by the sys   tem administrators     is a configuration utility program used to enable login access to  the MACS from individual workstations on your computer net   work     is a configuration utility program used to define colors for the  alarm messages and graphical images     is a configuration utility program used to configure t
219. out and  negotiate a connection  Specifying a short polling interval will also  force the pager to send very few pager messages in each tele   phone call  On the other hand  specifying a very long interval   such as an hour  will adversely affect the response time from the  people you want to page  Typical time intervals used for paging  are 3 to 5 minutes     Password edit box allows you to enter your pager service password  Some  service providers may require that you use a password when sub   mitting your page messages  In such a case  enter your password  in this field     Phone edit box allows you to enter the telephone number of your paging  service provider     To add a new service to your pager configuration  click on the Save push button  To  close dialog box without adding the service  click on the Quit push button     7 4 7 2 The Modify Pager Service    The Modify Pager Service dialog box allows you to modify an existing pager service  configuration  To modify a service configuration  highlight its name in the Pager  Service Selection dialog box and click on the Modify push button     The Modify Service dialog box has the same layout as the Add Service  described on  the previous pages     7 4 7 3 Delete Pager Service    To delete a service from your pager configuration  highlight the service name in the  Pager Service Selection dialog box and click on the Delete push button  The system  will respond with the following query     Micus Alarm and Control System 157  
220. pager  highlight your pager  name in the list in the Pager Configuration utility main dialog box  Then click on the  Serial Ports push button  The Serial Port Selection dialog box will pop up on the  screen  This dialog box allows you to add  modify and delete serial ports assigned to  your pager     The Serial Port Selection dialog box has the following layout        x     Serial Port Selection      COM1 Modify  Add    Delete          Exit    l                      10  MACS background modules are usually implemented as Windows NT services  Windows NT services them   selves cannot share allocated resources     11 Windows NT supports up to 255 serial ports     Micus Alarm and Control System 149    Configuration    The push buttons and their functions are     Modify allows you to modify the configuration of a serial port already allo   cated for your pager    Add allows you to allocate a new serial port for your pager    Delete allows you to remove the selected serial port from your pager    configuration   Exit closes the Serial Port Selection dialog box     7 4 5 1 Add Serial Port    When you start configuring your pager  the list of serial ports assigned to it will be  empty  Thus  you have to start your configuration process by allocating one or more  serial ports to the pager configuration  To add a serial port  click on the Add push  button  The Serial Port Configuration dialog box will appear        Serial Port Configuration       Name   COM1    Data rate    1200 v  Pari
221. picture       Set Program Access and Defaults  W Windows Catalog        Windows Update   AOL For Broadband      Launch RealOne Player          CD winzip  IECH Accessories  gt   Internet an Games  gt   Internet Explorer    H PrintMe Internet Printing di bi Colorcfg  E mail    Outlook Express H sis 650_651_M650_M652_740  gt  Democg  EH SoundMax  gt  IPGCfg  oe Spider Solitaire  H Startup  gt  IPGGUI  d Ly i  i IPEGUI  IX Adobe Reader 6 0 LogCfg     Internet Explorer MacsEditor  w MSN Explorer MacsManager  Notepad   A  Outlook Express MacsMenu  i IPGCfg e Remote Assistance Mast     Windows Media Player MapiCfg  A WordPad 43 Windows Messenger Menucfg  y fm MACS  gt  PagerCfg  i MO  H Microsoft Developer Network  gt      EH Microsoft Visual C   6 0  gt   Paint  H Real  gt   ea Wi  CH oats Sources  ODBC ei Winzip              AA MSN Messenger 6 0     RealOne Player    ed  uC RB zm    Micus Alarm and Control System 109    Configuration    The main MACS Color Definitions dialog box is depicted in the following figure           MACS Color Definitions  UNUSED POINT COLOR Modiy    WHITE ON BLACK S  WPA ALARAM OFF   WPA ALARAM ON Add                     WPA  DISPLAY  WPA GRAY   WPA GREEN Delete    WPA RED    WPA YELLOW    YELLOW ON BLACK View      YELLOW ON BLUE           YELLOW ON DARK BLUE  YELLOW ON DARK GRAY   YELLOW ON GREEN E    YELLOW ON MAGENTA v                   The dialog box has the following layout     Modify push button allows you to modify an existing color definition    A
222. pt telephone calls from  units  Usually  the MACS server polls each unit every few hours  to check the commu   nication link with the unit  The polling interval is configured individually for each unit  If  three consecutive calls to the unit fail  the MACS server issues a communication  alarm  In addition  MACS accepts and processes inbound calls from the units   Typically  units call the server when they detect an alarm condition     4 15 6 Network Connections    A growing number of vendors offer access to their equipment over a LAN or WAN   usually using the SNMP protocol  MACS server can monitor and control any number  of SNMP enabled devices  as long as it can connect to the equipment over a TCP IP  network     4 15 7 Digital Input Connections    MACS servers come with built in opto isolated digital inputs  These inputs can be  used to monitor environment sensors and contact closures on the equipment in close  proximity to the MACS server  The MACS server can be equipped with 8 to 128 digital  inputs     34 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 15 8 Output Relay Connections    MACS servers come with built in output relays  These relays can be used to switch  external devices on and off  The MACS server can be equipped with 8 to 128 output  relays     4 16 Hardware and System Software Overview    MACS software is a client server based application  Both server and client compo   nents run under the Windows XP  Windows 2000 or Windows NT operating system     4 16 
223. put point operational  status     To operate an output point  you need to select the point by pressing the small push  button displayed with the point name  To deselect the point  press the push button  again  or simply select another point  The currently selected point is marked with a red  square displayed in the push button     Once you select the point  you can operate the point using the push buttons from the  toolbar displayed at the bottom of the window     Set push button sets the point to its active state   Reset push button resets the point to its inactive state   Pulse push button pulses the point from its current state to the opposite    state and back to the initial state  The duration of the pulse is  equipment dependent     Toggle push button changes the state of the point from the current state  to the opposite state     Refresh push button refreshes the operational status of all points dis   played within the monitor window  Note that  for the equipment on  dial up lines  refreshing the operational status may require one or  more telephone calls     6 2 4 MACS IO Monitors    MACS servers come with built in opto isolated inputs and output relays  You can use  inputs to monitor equipment contact closures  and environment and security sensors   You can use output relays to control heating  air conditioning  opening external gates   acknowledging and silencing audible alarms and so on     Depending on your exact requirements  you can order a MACS server with a co
224. r                      Main Tx  _    Standby Tx     2  3  4  5  6  7  D                   e SET   RESET   PULSE   TOGGLE   REFRESH            The top section of the monitor window shows the MACS server front panel  and two  rows of LEDs that indicate the status of all input and output points  Note that these  LEDs are represented in monitor windows only  They do not actually exist in the  MACS server itself  LEDs for the unused points are left blank  For the configured  points  active inputs and outputs are shown as red  while inactive inputs and outputs  are shown as green     The bottom section of the monitor window contains two panels  The left hand panel  shows 8 input points  Unused points are left blank  Configured points are displayed  using colors and names that you selected through the configuration process     The right hand panel shows 8 output points  Unused points are left blank and their  push buttons are disabled  Configured points are displayed using colors and names  that you selected through the configuration process  As explained above  you can  operate these points using the SET  RESET  PULSE and TOGGLE push buttons     You can refresh the entire monitor window status using the REFRESH push button     74 Micus Alarm and Control System    6 2 4 2 Slot With 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs    Commands    If you select a MACS IO slot with 16 inputs and 16 outputs  the system will display the    following monitor window         f PCI DIO32 EM       Micus Alarm and Con
225. r Message LI    Pager Name  BELL_MBL v    User Name  Michael Bankovitch      Pager Number   637709    Message Text     Please call office immediately    Send Exit    Sea                     Micus Alarm and Control System 79    Commands    Pager Name pull down list allows you to select your destination pager service   For example  your system could use one paging service in the  Toronto area  and other paging services in the Montreal and Van   couver areas     User Name pull down list contains the names of all recipients associated with  the selected paging service  If you select a user name from the  list  the system will automatically fill the pager ID number in the  edit box below  If your recipient name does not appear on the list   you can enter the pager ID number manually     Pager Number field contains the pager ID number associated with the selected  recipient name  If your recipient is not preconfigured in the data   base  you can enter the pager ID number manually     Message Text edit box provides a field in which you type the text of the mes   sage you wish to send    Send push button sends a page  Once you select your recipient and  enter your message text  press this push button to send your  message    Exit push button closes the Send Message dialog box     6 5 Event Log    Each event report received from the equipment is stored into a log file  This feature  allows you to view and analyze all recorded alarm conditions and other events  The  system automaticall
226. r service and click on the right button  Select  Properties  You will see your Event Logger service configuration as depicted in the    following picture     Micus Alarm and Control System    123    Configuration    124       General Log On   Recovery   Dependencies      MACS Event Logger Properties  Local Computer  l 2 E       Service name  MacsLogger       Display name  MACS Event Logger       I    Description     Path to executable        C  MACS Programs  MacsLogger exe       Startup type  Automatic    Service status     from here     Start parameters          Automatic  Manual  Disabled       You can specify the start parameters that apply when you start the service       Resume       Apply    Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    To select an account under which you want the service to run  click on the Log On tab   Then specify the account name and password  Remember  if you change the account  password in the future  you will have to change it in these service properties as well     MACS Event Logger Properties  Local Computer        General Log Un   Recovery   Dependencies       Log on as     O Local System account         This account  MACS    Password  seseeececeesess    Contirm password  SOeeeeeeeeeeese    You can enable or disable this service for the hardware profiles listed below        Hardware Profile Service  Profile 1 Enabled                                  Micus Alarm and Control System 125    Configuration    To examine your Event Logger Win
227. r two worth of equipment log files and to archive the rest  First  use the Copy  Equipment Log command to copy old equipment log files to your archive media  Then   you can use the Delete Equipment Log command to remove the originals     Your MACS will maintain a separate equipment log for each unit that requires an  equipment log  Thus  before deleting the files  you have to select the equipment log  from which you want to delete files     To delete equipment log files  first select the time period  then click on the Select Files  button  The program will list all equipment log files for the selected time period in a  scrollable list box  Each file is displayed with a checkbox  indicating whether to delete  this file or not  Initially  all checkboxes are checked  You can uncheck those files that  you do not want to delete     Once you select the equipment log files to delete  click on the Delete button  You can  stop the process by clicking on the Stop button     To enter the Delete Equipment Log command  click on Archive   gt  Delete Equipment  Log     Micus Alarm and Control System 99    Commands     i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Me Archive Configuration Help         Copy Event Log      aa   SE  amp  H EI ie J   A E   Copy Equipment Log     Delete Event Log     Delete Equipment Log       The system will prompt you to select the unit for which you want to delete the  equipment log files        Equipmen
228. r typically contains a number of programs  This is due to  the highly modular MACS architecture  However  all these programs are carefully  integrated to appear to the user as a single MS Windows application  As a typical  MACS operator  you will need to use only the main user interface program     Usually  the  MACS Programs folder contains three types of programs     Configuration utilities    are the client programs used to configure the system  There are a  number of standard configuration utilities found in each MACS  installation  These utilities are used to define MACS colors and to  configure event reporting  MACS clients  custom monitor and  control windows and other features  In addition  there is one con   figuration utility for each type of equipment attached to the sys   tem  Typically  in the multi user environments  configuration  utilities may not be installed on all workstations  They are used  only by the operators responsible for the system configuration  and maintenance  Configuration utility names are shown with the  MACS icon and usually contain the acronym Cfg  as in Menu   Cfg exe      User Interface Programs    provide the user interface to the system  You must have at least  the MacsMenu exe user interface program installed  Other MACS  GUls are optional  User interface program names are shown with  the MACS icon     Equipment modules    are programs that execute in the background as Windows NT  services and actually communicate with the equipment  Y
229. rchive older log files  Once you archive your log files  you can remove the originals  from the MACS directories with delete commands     Note that the MACS GUI does not provide any commands to archive log files on tape   The reason for this is simple  the tape drive hardware usually comes with fairly sophis   ticated backup software  Thus  we recommend that you do your tape backups using  the software that came with your tape drive     MACS does not provide any database backup commands integrated with the GUI   Database backup is typically done off line  using configuration specific scripts     6 9 1 Copy Event Log    MACS maintains its event log in a dedicated directory  where it creates one event log  file per day  Over a period of time  MACS will generate a number of daily event log  files  You may decide to keep on line a month or two worth of log files and to archive  the rest  The Copy Event Log command allows you to copy your log files to another  directory  This directory may reside on another disk drive  a floppy  or on a network  drive on another computer on your network     The Copy Event Log dialog box has two groups of controls   ist of files and destination  directory  The first group allows you to select the log files that you want to archive   while the second group allows you to specify the destination directory     To copy log files  first select the time period  then click on the Select Files button  The  program will list all log files for the selected ti
230. reens    8 7 Adding Status and Control Points    After you add your custom screen name and background bitmap file to the configu   ration database  you are ready to add status and control points  To open your screen  for editing  select it in the Monitor Configuration dialog box list and click on the Open  push button  The Display Editor will load your background image into its working area           Source  fio POINTS      Server   Unit        Point   Type   IS  Active Above   AVS 481 ALARM OFF v  Inactive Within   AVS 481 ALARM OFF    Pulsed Below   AVS 481 ALARM OFF v  Show State   ACTIVE e    r Display Styles  I Read Only I Scientific                r Point Attributes  sl vf  nl  wl     GE Max   Name  Ir d Mr       Add   Delete   Modify   Save    fe ee                               Your next step is to add status and control points to your custom screen     To superimpose a point against your background image you have to   e Select the point you want to add   e Select the style to use when drawing the point   e Specify point coordinates    e Select point orientation    Micus Alarm and Control System 237    Creating Custom Screens    e If applicable  specify point size    e If applicable  select other point attributes  such as line thickness or action to take  when a point is clicked on     8 7 1 Selecting Points    As explained earlier in this document  MACS identifies all status and control points by  their server  unit  slot and point IDs  Each server  unit  slot and po
231. rsion 3 0  Joke    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help            Ta    ee H  Pa EI Create Set     Select Set          The Select Enumerated Set dialog box will pop up on the screen  For this dialog box  you can add  modify  delete and view currently defined enumerated sets  The Select  Enumerated Set dialog box has the following layout     Select Enumerated Set    Configure Set    Add Set    Delete Set    Define Values    View Sets         FIRST SET             Exit               262 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    The scrollable list on the left hand side of the dialog box contains a list of all presently  defined enumerated sets  Creating an enumerated set is a two step process  First  you  create the set itself  by assigning a name to it  Next  you add a set of value and  description pairs to the set     The Select Enumerated Set dialog box consists of the following push buttons     Configure Set allows you to rename an existing enumerated set    Add Set allows you to create a new enumerated set and to name it   Delete Set allows you to delete an existing enumerated set    Define Values allows you to add enumerated values to the set  modify these val     ues  delete them  and to view a list of values assigned to the  selected set     View Sets allows you to create and view a text report that contains a list of all  configured enumerated sets     Exit closes the Select Enumerated Set dialog box     8 9 1 1 Add Enumerated Set    To add
232. rted by a Windows  NT service  which communicates with the equipment and executes the equipment  specific commands  Usually  the equipment is attached to the computer either via a  serial line  or via TCP IP network connections  In addition  MACS servers may be  equipped with built in digital inputs and relays  Digital inputs may be used to monitor  contact closures and sensors  while relays may be used as electrical switches to  control external devices     Equipment modules communicate with the equipment using the equipment specific  communication protocol  Depending on the equipment capabilities  one or more units  can be attached to the computer via the same serial line  The equipment module can  be configured to use one or more serial ports  depending on the number of equipment  units attached to it     MACS equipment modules detect status changes and alarm conditions in two ways   by passively monitoring the equipment  or by actively polling the equipment status   Unsolicited messages from the equipment or responses to the polls are then trans   lated into user defined status and alarm messages and sent to the clients     When a client sends a request to operate the equipment  the equipment module  executes the request and sends a response back to the client     14 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    ge Opto isolated inputs  Po Output relays  Equipment Serial ports    Module A H 7  Equipment     R5485 es  Module B le  es ee os Se zs    Equipment  Module C  Equ
233. rtical Histogram    In this example  you will present an analog point value using a vertical histogram     To add an analog input point to you custom screen  do the following   e From the Source pull down list  select JO POINTS     e From the Server pull down list  select the equipment module that contains the  point you are interested in     e From the Unit pull down list  select the unit that contains the point you are inter   ested in     e From the Point pull down list  select the point you are interested in  In this  example  make sure to select an analog input     Source   i0 POINTS     Server   MACS DEMO   si 25  Unit  oem 2  Point  TEMERATURE     79    Type  Analog Input    At this point  the editor will indicate in the read only field Type whether you selected a  digital input  digital output  analog input or analog output point  At the same time  it will  present the display styles applicable to the selected point type     First  select the colors that you want to use for the value within limits  above the upper  threshold and below the lower threshold  As always  you can select different colors  or  you can select the same colors for all three values     Colors    Active Above  RED ON GREEN e  Inactive Within   LIGHT GREEN ON DARE    Pulsed Below   LIGHT GREEN ON DARE      Show State        Next  select the point style  In this example  you will select the vertical histogram bar     284 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Display Styles  l 
234. s     To configure your pager to send event reports to the event logger  highlight the pager  name in the Pager Configuration utility main dialog box and click on the Event  Reporting push button     The Event Reporting dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the  following layout     152 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration                Computer name   DOSITEJ  Protocol Port   4446 Add Delete            Event Reporting  MACS Recipients Selected Recipients  LOGGER DOSITEJ 4448  PAGER       Exit          MACS Recipients    Computer name    Protocol Port    Selected Recipients    Add    is a list of all possible event reportrecipients known to your pager   You can select your event report recipient from that list  or you  can enter it manually in the Computer Name and the Protocol Port  fields  Typically  you will configure your pager to send its event  reports to your event logger     edit box allows you to enter the destination computer name   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Computer Name field is filled in automatically     edit box allows you to enter the destination TCP IP protocol port   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Protocol Port field is filled in automatically     list contains all already configured recipients  These are the desti   nations to which your pager will send event reports  Typically  the  list will contain only your event logger     push button allows you 
235. s  Active  fo  Inactive   o  Active  Test    MAIN HYDRO FAILURE DETECTED  Color    DEFAULT MAJOR D  Severity   WARNING z lv Page  Inactive  Text   MAIN HYDRO RECOVERED  Color   YELLOW ON BLUE D  Severity    WARNING z    Page          Save Delete   Quit               Micus Alarm and Control System 181    Configuration    In this example  the Page checkbox for the active point state is checked  This means  that if a Main Hydro alarm is detected  the system will include the MAIN HYDRO  FAILURE DETECTED event report into the e mail or fax messages to those users  configured to receive this particular message  You can assign any given message to  any number of users  When the corresponding alarm or status condition occurs  the  system will include the respective event report into the e mail or fax messages for all  users configured to receive that event report     To specify which event reports to include in the e mail or fax messages to a given  user  highlight the user name in the list box in the MAPI Users dialog box and click on  the MAPI Messages push button     The MAPI Messages dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box will indicate  the name of the selected user on the caption bar  The dialog box layout is depicted in  the following picture            MAPI Messages For Michael Bankovitch  MAPI messages assigned to this user   Server  Unit  Slot  Point   RSM 3 RSM 3 INPUTS LOBBY  PYLON RSM 3 RSM 3 OUTPUTS AIR CONDITIONER    PYLON RSM 3 RSM 3 OUTPUTS AUDIBLE  PYLO
236. s Alarm and Control System    Commands    To open the Delete Event Log dialog box  click on Archive   gt  Delete Event Log           7 Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX  File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Mie Archive Configuration Help    Copy Event Log     a   EE S   EI eet E 7 A EI md Copy Equipment Log     Delete Event Log       Delete Equipment Log       If your system is configured to maintain more than one event log  you will be prompted  to select the event log you want to delete files from        Select Event Log       IBS  LOGGER  SENTRY    Cancel                     The pull down list in the Select Event Log dialog box contains the names of all event  loggers in your system  Select the logger you are interested in and click the OK push  button  To exit the command without selecting the logger  click on the Cancel push but   ton     Once you select the event log  the Delete Event Log dialog box will pop up on the  screen  The dialog box layout is depicted in the following picture     Micus Alarm and Control System 97    Commands    List of files  From date    To date    Select Files  File list    98       Delete Event Log       List of files     From date   25 Jan 2000 00 00 00  To date   25 Jan 2004 23 59 59    Select Files    2000_04_02  2000_04_29  2000_04_30  2000_05_03  2000_05_04  2000_05_05  2000_05_07  2000_05_08  2000_05_09  2000_05_10  2000_05_11  2000 05 12                                              K K K K K K K K K K K     
237. s And Alarm Processing           2000eee cece eee eee eee 17   4 4 Monitor And Control Wmmdows eee eee eee eee 18   45 Configuration  sr EES ac eee seagate SEET See EE 25   4 6 Event Log Management    26   rei E  EE 27   4 8 E mail andtax  000 c eee eee 27   4 9 Trouble Tickets   sci ces ede eee teed ee Seni eee eee a 27   4 10 Multi user Support           0 000 eee 28   4 11 Remote Access ENEE eee eee eee ee ee eee 29   412    Networking 2 ene   r ie hn ee Paks eee eee ee rep D A 29   4 13 Security EE ERENNERT eta ete ioe ees 29   4 14 On line Diagnostics    30    Micus Alarm and Control System i    Table of Contents    4 15 System Connections           000 e eee eee 31  4 15 1 Regional and Master Servers           00  c cece eee eee eee eee 31  4 15 2 Client Connections to Servers         000  e eee eee eee 32  4 15 3 Equipment Connections to Servers 0 00 eee eee eee 33  4 15 4 Direct Connections         0 0  e cece eee 34  4 15 5 Dial up Connections         0    c cece eee eee eee 34  4 15 6 Network Connections        0    0c cece eee eee eee 34  4 15 7 Digital Input Connections         0 00  cee eee eee 34  4 15 8 Output Relay Connections          00  cece eee eee 35   4 16 Hardware and System Software Overview             200 eeeeeeeeee 35  4 16 1 Client Components          0 0 c cece eee eee 35  4 16 2 Server Components  0 00  c cece eee eee 35   5 Getting Started EE OF   5 1 MACS Stanup     0252 e5ecin sets eege sen nde 40   5 1 1 MACS Services Startup    1    0 00 cec
238. s only on a single system  administrator s workstation  This prevents other MACS users from making arbitrary  and incoherent changes in the MACS configuration     Your second option is to install configuration utilities on more than one workstation   but not to provide access to these utilities directly from the MACS GUI  This approach  will give a group of authorized individuals access to MACS  while preventing casual  MACS users from making configuration changes     You could also allow all MACS users access to some utilities  such as the Display  Editor  while restricting access to the utilities used to define alarm  status and control  points     Finally  you could allow full access to all MACS configuration utilities by providing  access to configuration programs through the MACS main GUI  The following pages  illustrate how to do this option     As shown throughout this manual  there are two methods to start MACS configuration  utilities     e From the Windows Start menu  by clicking on Start   gt  Programs   gt  MACS   gt        e From the MACS main GUI  by clicking on the configuration icon or by selecting  configuration from the menu bar     7 7 1 Adding Configuration Utilities to Windows Start Menu    The setup programs used to install MACS configuration utilities automatically create a  MACS program group and add it to the Windows Start menu  Therefore  if you install  configuration utilities on your local workstation  they will automatically show up in your  Start
239. s value will be one of the valid data rates     When a set of discrete analog values is known  it is sometime more convenient to use  description instead of numerical values  For example  the following list shows several  TV channels     3 Global  6 CBC   40 Bravo  50 Space    If you assign a description to each valid numerical value  the point values are  enumerated  If you use an enumerated point style in your custom screens  the system  will display descriptions rather than numbers  In the above example  it will display TV  channel names instead of numbers     To add enumerated points to your custom screens  you have to   e Create a set of enumerated values   e Link the set with an analog point     e Add the enumerated point to your custom screen     Micus Alarm and Control System 261    Creating Custom Screens    8 9 1 Enumerated Sets    To use enumerated points in your custom screens  you have to link them with a set of  enumerated values  Note that the same enumerated set may apply to more than one  point  and more than one custom screen  For example  your TV channel listings may  apply to all receivers that you want to include in several of your custom screens  This  is why you define enumerated sets first  and then you use them when you draw  enumerated points in your custom screens     To manage your enumerated sets  you will use the Create Set command  To open it   click on the Enumerated Sets   gt  Create Set item in the main menu             MACS Display Editor Ve
240. sconnects from the server before exit     In some cases  you may need to connect and disconnect manually  For example  if  you have more than one MACS server  you may need to select the server and to con   nect to it manually  To connect and disconnect manually  use the commands  described on the following pages     6 1 1 Connect Command    To manually connect your workstation to the MACS server  use the Connect com   mand  To run the Connect command  click on the Monitor pull down menu and select  the Connect menu item     d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8 Lok    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager   Evert Log View Archive Configuration Help    Se    deg sai de    Command Line              Status Monitor      Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node        Alternatively  click on the toolbar icon depicted below     zl Connect to MACS server    56 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    In either case The Connect To MACS dialog box will pop up on the screen        Connect To MACS  EN                         Connect push button connects your GUI to the MACS server selected from  the drop down list  The list shows the names of the servers you  are not already connected to  If you are already connected to all  existing servers  the list will be empty  For example  if your MACS  has only one server and you are already connected to that server   there will be no server names on the list     Quit push button closes the dialog box after the connection has been  es
241. sh button     Lock push button locks the selected unit  If the unit is on a dial up line   the system will dial out  and keep the telephone line off the hook  as long as the unit is locked     Unlock push button unlocks the selected unit  If the unit is on a dial up  line  the system will hang up the telephone call and release the  dial up line    Exit push button closes the Equipment Locking dialog box     78 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    6 4 Pager    Your MACS system can be equipped with a pager module  which automatically sends  alarm messages to a predefined list of page recipients  In addition to sending page  messages automatically  the system also allows you to manually compose and send  page messages     6 4 1 Send Pager Message    The Send Message command is used to manually send page messages  To execute  this command  click on the Pager pull down menu and select the Send Message item     d   Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 Joe  F Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Yiew Archive Configuration Help               ae a HCH  Send Message     e    Alternatively  you can click on the pager icon        Al Send message    Your MACS supports a multiple pager service  Thus  to send a message  first select  the pager service name  After that  select the user name or type the pager ID  manually  Finally  enter the text of your message and press the Send push button     The Send Message dialog box has the following layout              Send Page
242. sh button     Micus Alarm and Control System 167    Configuration    7 5 E mail and Fax Configuration    MACS MAP    Interface    is an optional add on component  which sends the same  alarm messages displayed on the MACS GUI screens to one or more e mail and or  fax recipients  Based on the event being reported  the MAPI interface selects from the  database a list of personnel interested in that event  and sends e mail and or fax  messages to all individuals on the list     For example  your company could offer network and system management services to  your clients  While your company will take care of each individual alarm condition as it  happens  the client companies may ask for daily reports  that contain a list of all  important events  In such a scenario  you can use the MAPI interface to automatically  create daily reports and to e mail or fax them to your clients  You program your MAPI  interface to run once a day  and you define a list of all possible event reports to be e   mailed or faxed to each client  MACS will then queue these events as they happen   and once a day automatically compose an e mail or fax message and send it to your  client     Note that the MACS MAPI module provides only the interface to the native Windows  MAPI services  To use the MACS MAPI  you must install and configure on your  computer the native e mail and fax services     The Windows NT operating system imposes some severe technical restrictions  related to sending e mail  For this rea
243. son we no longer support MACS MAPI under  the Windows NT     When you use Windows XP  you must carefully select your default MAPI service to  allow other services to send e mail  For example  Microsoft Outlook or Netscape will  not allow any other service to send e mail  This is why we recommed using Microsoft  Outlook Express  which comes with the Windows XP operating system at no extra  cost     To enable sending e mail using the Outlook Express  you need to adjust its configu   ration as follows  Open Outlook Express and click on the Tools menu item  Then  select Options item from the pull down list        14 The Messaging Application Programming Interface  MAPI  is a medium independent messaging architecture  that enables multiple applications to interact with multiple systems across a variety of hardware platforms     15 To send MAPI messages  MACS actually submits e mail and fax messages to the Windows NT native MAPI  system  Thus  the MACS MAPI program provides only the interface to the Windows NT native MAPI service     168 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration              File Edit    i     Create Mail    View Message Help                Send and Receive                Synchronize All Delete          Address Book    Ctrl Shift  B    Add Sender to Address Book                     Folders   Ka Outlook Express     Local Folders   fa Inbox  1  ES Outbox    CH Sent Items     Deleted Iter           Message Rules       ber services         Windows Messenger L    
244. ssage originates     Details push button allows you to display details on the selected MAPI  message  There are two Details push buttons in the dialog box   one for each list  If you want to see the text messages assigned to    Micus Alarm and Control System 183    Configuration    Delete    Add    a given event  highlight the event in either the top or bottom list   and click on the corresponding Details push button  The MAPI  Event Details dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog  box layout is presented on the following pages     push button allows you to delete a MAPI message assigned to  the selected user  To delete a message  highlight it in the top list  box and click on the Delete button     push button allows you to add new MAPI messages to the  selected user  To add a message  highlight it in the bottom list  box  and click on the Add push button  Note that the bottom list  box accepts multiple selections  By clicking on several lines at a  time  you can add all of them at once  The lines you select do not  have to be adjacent  To de select a line  click on it again     7 5 6 2 Event Details    The MAPI Messages dialog box  described on the previous pages  contains a list of  messages assigned to the selected user  and a list of all MAPI events  In both of  these lists  events that can be sent as MAPI messages are displayed using their  respective server  unit  slot and point names  To see the text assigned to each point  state  highlight the event in the l
245. stem    Commands    6 10 2 Configuration Options   There are a few configuration options that you can set locally to apply only to your own  workstation  These options are    e Sounds to play upon receiving event reports    e User   s manual on line setup    To set these options  click on the Configuration menu and select Options      i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1  Jog    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Mie Archive Configuration Help       z   eaBjesleld  al el 27     The User Interface Options dialog box has the following layout        User Interface Options    Critical alarm sound   D  MACS Config SoundCritical wav    Major alarm sound    D  MACS    Config S oundM ajor  wav    Minor alarm sound    D  MACS Config SoundMinor way    Warning sound     On line User s Manual   C  Program Files Adobe Acrobat 4 0  Reader AcroRd32  D  MACS    Config MACS User s Manual  pdf     Cancel                           Critical alarm sound edit box allows you to specify which wave file to play upon receiv   ing an event report with the critical severity level  If you leave this  edit box blank  no sound will be played upon receiving a critical  alarm     Major alarm sound edit box allows you to specify which wave file to play upon receiv   ing an event report with the major severity level  If you leave this  edit box blank  no sound will be played upon receiving a major  alarm     Micus Alarm and Control System 105    Commands    Minor alarm sound edit box al
246. stem 249    Creating Custom Screens    Solid half width rectangle  Transparent half width rectangle  Solid full width rectangle  Transparent full width rectangle  Line   Round LED   Square LED   Push button   Switch   Baseball switch   Door   Read only points    Bitmap    8 7 7 Summary Display Styles    When you select a summary point  the Display Editor will present a choice of display    styles depicted in the following picture     250       m Display Styles  I Read Only       T Scientific       oO  B  E          Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    Styles available to draw summary points are     Solid rectangle proportional to the point name length  Transparent rectangle proportional to the point name length  Solid custom size rectangle   Transparent custom size rectangle   Solid half width rectangle   Transparent half width rectangle   Solid full width rectangle   Transparent full width rectangle   Round LED   Square LED   Push button    8 7 8 Specifying Point Attributes    Depending on the type of the point being displayed  there are a number of attributes  that you can adjust  specify or select  Point attributes are set using the fields depicted  in the following picture     Point Attributes   x   o i  fo H  0 W io  Options  E Max    0 00  Name  v  Min    0 00    Add Delete   Modify Save       X  Y Coordinates edit boxes X and Y are used to specify the point position within    the window  Coordinates are calculated in pixels  relative to the  top
247. t   Macs  E  Password          id  Confirm bss    Password        Help             7 2 2 Configure Event Logger    The Configure Server command allows you to change an existing event logger config   uration  In the current MACS software release  the event logger configuration changes  take effect on the first subsequent Windows NT service startup  Therefore  after  making changes in your Event Logger configuration  make sure to restart the corre   sponding Windows NT service     To change the configuration of an existing event logger  highlight the event logger  name in the list  and click the Configure Server push button in the Event Log Configu   ration utility main dialog box     The Modify Event Log Configuration dialog box has the same layout as the Add Event  Logger  described on the previous pages     Micus Alarm and Control System 127    Configuration    7 2 3 Delete Event Logger    To delete an existing event logger configuration  highlight the name of the event  logger you want to delete  and click on the Delete Server push button in the Event Log  Configuration utility main dialog box     The following dialog box will pop up        MACS Event Log Configuration       This server may be used for your event monitoring   Are you sure you want to delete it                 To delete the selected event logger  click on the Yes push button  To exit the dialog  box without deleting the event logger  click on the No push button     7 2 4 Event Reporting    One of the main Ev
248. t Log Configuration dialog  box will pop up on the screen     Conceptually  MACS could be configured to maintain more then one event log  The  Event Log Configuration utility will allow you to add more than a single Event Logger to  your system  For example  if you have more than one MACS server  then each server  could maintain its own event log  This configuration is frequently used in configurations       4  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained later in this document  in Access To Config   uration Utilities     Micus Alarm and Control System 119    Configuration    where regional MACS server report to a master MACS server in a central location   However  most of the systems use a single event log     When you run the utility  the list box on the left hand side will show all presently  configured event loggers  When you run the utility for the first time  the list box will be  empty  and you will have to add your Event Logger to the system  Once your Event  Logger is configured  the Event Log Configuration utility will allow you to view and to  modify that configuration     The Event Log Configuration utility main dialog box is depicted in the following picture           MACS Event Log Configuration    Add Server  Delete Server  Event Reporting  View Server                      Exit       The push buttons and other functions are     Configure Server  Add Server  Delete Server    Event Reporting    View Server    Exit    120    allows you to m
249. t Selection  Equipment Type  Unit Name   COMSTREAM  IV CTRL PANEL E  IV MONITOR OTTAWA  MONTREAL  RMS 3  SENTRY       Cancel                     The Equipment Selection dialog box has the following layout     Equipment Type scrollable list contains the names of all equipment types   Remember that the equipment log is maintained only for some  equipment  If you select the equipment for which there is no  equipment log  the system will not find any equipment log files     When you select the equipment type  the system will display the  names of all units of that type in the Unit Name list     100 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    Unit Name scrollable list contains the names of all units of the selected equip   ment type  As you change your equipment type selection  the list  of unit names is updated accordingly     Select push button confirms your equipment unit selection and closes  the window   Cancel push button allows you to exit the Delete Equipment Log com     mand without selecting any equipment     If the equipment log for the selected equipment cannot be found  the system will not  list any equipment log files  If your equipment unit selection is valid  you can use the  Delete Equipment Log dialog box to delete the selected files  The dialog box layout is  depicted in the following picture        Delete Equipment Log       List of files     From date   25 Jan 2000 00 00 00  To date   25 Jan 2004 23 59 59    Select Files         2000_04_02  2000_04_29  2000_
250. t least one  output point  it automatically displays at the bottom of the screen a toolbar that  contains Set  Reset  Pulse  Toggle and Refresh push buttons     A typical control screen is depicted in the following picture     226 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    fii  Remote Station Monitor    REMOTE STATION MONITOR    345 6 7 8      181861018018        8 3 Steps To Create A Custom Screen    To create your own custom screen and add it to the MACS configuration  you need to  do the following     e Create your graphical image background  using a graphic editor of your choice   The simplest way to create a background image is to use Microsoft Paint  which  comes with the operating system at no cost  You could also use other graphic  editors  such as CorelDraw or Adobe PhotoShop  You can invoke your graphic  editor from within the Display Editor  which gives you a fully integrated design  environment     e Using the Display Editor  add a custom screen  link it with the graphical image  background  and assign a name to your screen     e Using the Display Editor  add status and control points to your screen and select  the style  color and position to use when displaying each point     Micus Alarm and Control System 227    Creating Custom Screens    8 4 Selecting Graphic Editor    To invoke your graphic editor from the MACS Display Editor toolbar  you need to con   figure your graphic editor as one of the MACS configuration utilities  Specifically  you  
251. t server application  Both server and clients run on a Windows XP   Windows 2000 or Windows NT platform   All network connections between clients and  servers are over the TCP IP network  In addition  MACS uses MS networking features   such as disk and printer sharing  to access remote files and printers  Alternatively   access to the remote files over a WAN can be done using the File Transfer Protocol   FTP      MACS servers are capable of sending their event reports to any number of remote  locations  via a TCP IP network  At the same time  MACS servers listen to the service  requests from the TCP IP network  Thus  MACS servers can be configured into a  hierarchical structure of regional servers and master servers  An example of a hierar   chical topology involving regional and master MACS servers is depicted in the  following figure     Master  Servers       Regional Severs       2  Some of the MACS server components are available for the SCO OpenServer UNIX operating system  but our  focus in this document is on the Windows NT version of the product     Micus Alarm and Control System 31    Overview    This figure illustrates the connectivity between master and regional servers  Regional  servers send their event reports to one or more master servers  Both master and  regional servers listen to the TCP IP network and accept service requests from the  clients     4 15 2 Client Connections to Servers    The clients can be located anywhere on the TCP IP LAN or WAN network  Th
252. tablished     6 1 2 Disconnect Command    The Disconnect command allows you to manually disconnect your GUI from the  surveillance system server  To manually disconnect from the server  click on the  Monitor pull down menu and select the Disconnect menu item     d Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 8 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   Mea Archive Configuration Help    E A    Command Line     Status Monitor      Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node                 Micus Alarm and Control System 57    Commands    Alternatively  click on the toolbar icon depicted below     zl Disconnect from MACS server    The Disconnect From Alarm System dialog box will pop up        Disconnect From MACS       x                       Disconnect push button disconnects your GUI from the server selected from  the drop down list  The list contains the names of all servers that  you are already connected to  Typically  the list will contain only  the name of your primary MACS server     Quit push button closes the dialog box after the GUI is disconnected  from the server     6 1 3 Select MACS Node    If your installation consists of a network of MACS servers  these servers may share  the same database  or each of them could have its own database  When you run your  GUI from a workstation connected to a TCP IP network  your GUI can connect to any  of the databases used by MACS     When it starts  the GUI will open its default database  which is the last database it was
253. te any other PLC  outputs   If yes  replace the PLC output module     If the computer cannot operate any PLC outputs  enable sl ad                   Save   Print   T Accepted   Suspended  I Closed  0371471959 12 48 40 PM          4 10 Multi user Support    MACS is a multi user system  Any number of users can monitor alarms  or perform  various control and configuration tasks concurrently     Each user interface connected to the system is a completely independent client  program that may run on any computer on the TCP IP network     Each operator can perform various tasks independently from any other user on the  system  The only restriction is that two operators cannot access the same piece of  equipment simultaneously  This feature protects the equipment from the conflicting  requests issued by different operators     28 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 11 Remote Access    The MACS can be accessed remotely either via the serial modem connections  ISDN  connections or the local area network  Remote access via serial lines can be used as  long as at least one computer on the local area network is configured to support a dial   in modem line     Similarly  serial ports used by the system to communicate with the equipment can be  configured to connect either directly to the equipment  or to use dial up modem  connections     Windows XP operating system comes with a built in Remote Desktop feature  It is  important to emphasize the difference between using the remo
254. te desktop and MACS  client GUI     The remote desktop presents the entire screen of the remote computer  If you start a  program using the remote desktop  the program will actually run on the remote  computer  Since the remote desktop copies the entire remote computer screen  it is  very  very slow  in particular over the serial lines     By contrast  when you use the MACS client GUI  the GUI actually runs on your  workstation  It connects to the server to exchange only the minimum amount of infor   mation needed to locally present status and control information  Thus  the difference in  performance between the remote desktop and the MACS GUI is huge  at least two  orders of magnitude     4 12 Networking    MACS provides full LAN and WAN support  as well as dial in modem connections  The  system may be configured to use any physical network topology as long as the TCP IP  protocol is available for that network  Therefore  the system may run on the token ring  and Ethernet networks  and across wide area networks  using bridges and routers  In  addition  clients and servers may use Point To Point Protocol  PPP   to communicate  using TCP IP over dial up serial lines and Remote Access Service  RAS      4 13 Security    MACS servers run on the Windows NT platform  which conforms to the Class C2  security level  Windows NT grants access to various resources either to individual  users or to user groups  In addition  Windows NT recognizes its own domain and  trusted external users
255. that the length of your conversation with the unit is ultimately limited by the  amount of memory your computer can allocate for the contents of the scrolling  window     6 2 2 Status Monitors    To access the list of status monitors  click the Monitors pull down menu and select the  Status Monitor menu item             Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog Yiew Archive Configuration Help    a  d G ei    e     Command Line      Status Monitor      Equipment Specific      Select MACS Node                 Alternatively  click on the corresponding toolbar icon depicted in the picture below     EI User defined status monitors    The Status Monitors dialog box pops up        Monitors           Analog Test Monitor  Building Layout  File Copy Control  FTP       GI Encoder   Image Video Monitor   IPG Test   IV Summary Test   Large Test Image   Leitch AYS 481   Look Network Ontario   Montreal Site   MPEG Test w      Exit                      Micus Alarm and Control System 65    Commands    The dialog box has the following layout     Monitor List is a scrollable list of all user defined monitors in your system  To  select the monitor you are interested in  highlight the monitor  name and click on the Open push button     Open push button opens the selected monitor window   Exit push button closes the dialog box     A typical user defined monitor window is depicted in the following picture     Regional Map                     
256. the editor will indicate in the read only field Type whether you selected a  digital input  digital output  analog input or analog output point  At the same time  it will  present the display styles applicable to the selected point type     First  select the colors that you want to use for the active and for the inactive point  state  Note that the pulsed point state is ignored     Micus Alarm and Control System 277    Creating Custom Screens    Colors    Active Above    DEFAULT CRITICAL D  Inactive Within     DEFAULT WARNING e    Pulsed Below    DEFAULT WARNING v    Show State    ACTIVE v      Next  select the point style  In this example  you will select a variable size rectangle  with the solid background     Display Styles  l Read Only l Scientific  Go        FIRST    O  Pt  FIRST 2    FIRST    a    i  t          FIRST    SI    Next  you need to add your point to your custom screen  Place the mouse pointer to  the location in the custom screen where you want to position the top left corner of your  point  Press the right button and drag the mouse to create a rectangle which repre   sents your point location and size  As you drag the mouse  the coordinates and size of  your point rectangle will show up in the Point Attributes     Point Attributes   be Gei elen Him   Ww   25    Options     Max  0 00  Name  E Min  om    Add   Modify   Save      278 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    You can adjust the rectangle size and location by manually changing
257. the left hand side of the dialog box contains a list of all presently  defined enumerated values for the selected enumerated set  The rest of the dialog  box consists of the following push buttons     Configure Value allows you to modify an existing enumerated value     Add Value allows you to add a new enumerated value to the set    Delete Value allows you to delete an existing enumerated value from the set    View Values allows you to create and view a text report that contains a list of  all configured enumerated values for the selected enumerated  set    Exit closes the Select Enumerated Value dialog box     266 Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    8 9 2 1 Add Enumerated Value    To add a new enumerated value to the selected enumerated set  open the Select  Enumerated Value dialog box and click on the Add Value push button  The Add  Enumerated Value dialog box will pop up on the screen        Add Enumerated Value       Value ID  0    Set ID  0    Value   g    Color   YELLOW ON GREEN    Short Description     Long Description          Cancel                   This dialog box consists of the following     Value ID read only field shows the enumerated value database identifier    Set ID read only field shows the parent enumerated set database identi   fier    Value edit box allows you to enter the associated integer value    Color pull down list allows you to select a color combination to use when    displaying the enumerated value     Short Descriptio
258. the server via a LAN or WAN network  Once  you are connected to the server  you get all the alarms and you can use any other  command to monitor and to control your equipment  The GUI program that you run on  your workstation is referred to as the client  Clients can run on either Windows XP   Windows 2000 or Windows NT workstations  which may be located anywhere on your  TCP IP network  They can connect to the server using either a local or wide area net   work  including dial up and Point to Point Protocol  PPP  connections and Remote  Access Service  RAS   You can also run your client program on the server itself  In  such a case  you need only one computer for your entire alarm system     In addition to equipment monitoring and control  the clients also provide a set of com   mands to view  print  analyze and manage the event log     Finally  the clients encompass a set of utilities  which are used to configure the system     3 5 Configuration    All key system parameters are field configurable  The system configuration is done  using a set of configuration utilities  all of which are based on a consistent  user friendly  GUI  All configuration parameters are stored in the configuration database  Although  the configuration database contains many parameters  most of them are set automati   cally and you must enter only those parameters where the system allows choices     In addition  MACS provides means to configure and initialize various pieces of equip   ment  Depending
259. ting any equipment     If the equipment log for the selected equipment cannot be found  the system will  display your current folder contents in a standard MS Windows dialog box  From this  point  you can manually select the folder that contains the equipment log you are inter   ested in     If your equipment unit selection is valid  the Select Equipment Log File dialog box will  Pop up        Select Equipment Log File    Look in    CQ GI ENCODER          ex Ee           E 2000_06_15      2000_06_16  E  2000_06_17                File name  2000_06_21  Files of type  e Cancel      The Select Equipment Log File dialog box is a standard MS Windows dialog box that  allows you to open a file  In the scrollable working area  the box will show you all daily  equipment log files for the selected unit  Select the file you want to view and click on  the Open push button                    Daily equipment log file names have the following format     YYYY_MM_DD   where    YYYY represents the year  MM represents the month  DD represents the day    Micus Alarm and Control System 85    Commands    When you select a file  the system will open the file using the WordPad text editor   From within the editor  you can print the file  save it into another file  search for a  particular character string  cut and paste event reports  and perform other functions  typical of WordPad     An example of a log file format is depicted in the following picture     2000_06_17   WordPad Joey    File Edit vie
260. tion             GUI Computer  Event Source     DOSITEJ   LOGGER  DOSITEJ  YUK   LOGGER  VUK       Add GUI  Modify GUI  Delete GUI  View GUIs    MACS Nodes    Exit     lt  KEL           GUI Computer  Event Source  Add GUI  Modify GUI  Delete GUI  View GUIs  MACS Nodes    Exit    134       scrollable list allows you to select the workstation for which you  want to configure MACS user interface     scrollable list allows you to select the event logger that you want  access from the selected workstation     push button allows you to add a new workstation to the list  thus  allowing this workstation to login into your MACS system     push button allows you to modify the selected workstation config   uration     push button allows you to delete a workstation from the list  thus  disallowing login access to MACS to that workstation     push button allows you to create and view a text report that con   tains a list of all presently configured workstations     push button opens a dialog box  which allows you to manage  your list of MACS nodes     push button exits the user interface configuration utility program     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 3 1 Add User Interface    To grant MACS login access to a new workstation  click on the Add GUI push button   The Add User Interface dialog box will pop up on the screen  This dialog box has the    following layout                 Add User Interface  GUI computer name    Michael D  Event logger service name   LOGGER D  
261. tion utility for the first time  the list of existing MAPI    interfaces will be empty  and you will have to add a new interface to your system  configuration     To add a new MAPI interface  click on the Add Server button in the MAPI Configu   ration main dialog box  and the New Server Configuration dialog box will appear        New Server Configuration       Server name   Computer name   Protocol port     0  Polling interval  fo    Text Event Log     Text log path     Binary Event Log     Binary log path                          The New Server Configuration dialog box has the following layout     Server name edit box allows you to specify the name of your MAPI interface   This name will appear in all event reports originated by the MAPI  interface     The name you select must be the same as the name you speci   fied while installing the MAPI interface program  The program  uses this name on startup  to query its configuration from the  database  If there is a mismatch in names  the program will not  find its configuration and will not start properly     174 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Computer name edit box allows you to specify the name of the computer your  MAPI interface program will run on  This name is used  in con   junction with the protocol port  by other computers and programs  on your network to establish a TCP IP connection with your MAPI  interface     Protocol port edit box allows you to specify the TCP IP protocol port your MAPI  interfa
262. tl  i IPGCFg gD Remote Assistance bi Mapicfg     windows Media Player iP MenuCfg  Ei WordPad 43 Windows Messenger iP PagerCfg                    bd cn  i Gester  M  Microsoft Developer Network  gt     Location  C  MACS Programs  f   Microsoft Visual C   6 0  gt   Paint  H Real d  i Mac 3 winzip  gt   f A8 MSN Messenger 6 0  All Programs         RealOne Player    start IWA 12 33PM    If your system is configured to provide access to the configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI   you can also start the MACS IO configuration utility by selecting  configuration utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu or by  clicking the Configuration button on the toolbar        1  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained later in this document  in Access To Config   uration Utilities     Micus Alarm and Control System 189    Configuration     i Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1  Jog    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog View Archive Configuration Help    E   Co Select tity  gt   oie  Dien eo 4    Select Configuration Utility             The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities              Color Definitions  Demo Server Configuration  Display Editor  DSR 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration   File Copy Configuration   GI Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Moni
263. to add a new event report recipient to the  Selected Recipients list  To add a new recipient  select it from the  MACS Recipients list  or enter the computer name and the proto   col port manually  Then click on the Add push button     Micus Alarm and Control System 153    Configuration    Delete push button allows you to delete an entry from the Selected  Recipients list  To delete a recipient  highlight it in the Selected  Recipients list and click the Delete push button     Exit push button closes the Event Reporting dialog box     When you add a destination to the Selected Recipients list  make sure that the corre   sponding service is actually running at the specified location on your network  If the  service is not running  your pager will attempt to connect to this service on each event  report  and time out after several seconds  This delay will severely impede the overall  MACS performance  If you decide not to use a particular event report recipient for a  period of time  make sure to take it off from the Selected Recipients list  and to restart  your pager Windows NT service     7 4 7 Pager Services    To use your pager  you have to configure at least one pager service  However   depending on your requirements  you may need to configure more than a single pager  service  For example  you may want to use one service to page your personnel in the  Toronto area  and other services for the Montreal area and Vancouver area     In this context  each service that you add 
264. to delete this value              To delete the selected enumerated value  click on the Yes push button  To close the  message box without deleting the value  click on the No push button     8 9 2 4 View Enumerated Values    To create a report that contains a list of all enumerated values for a given set  open  the Select Enumerated Values dialog box and click on the View Values push button   The system will create a report and present it on the screen using the WordPad text  editor  From within the editor  you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for  keywords  cut and paste  and perform other functions typical of WordPad  A typical  report layout is depicted in the following figure     268 Micus Alarm and Control System    Enumerated Values   Notepad  File Edit Format Wie Help    Set  FIRST SET   Short text  Global   Alarm text    ID  1   color  YELLOW ON DARK BLUE  Value  8    Set  FIRST SET  Short text  CBC  Alarm text    ID  3   color  YELLOW ON  Value  6    set  FIRST SET  Short text  CNN  Alarm text     ID  4  color  YELLOW ON BRIGHT RED  Value  33    Set  FIRST SET  Short text  Showcase  Alarm text    ID  5   color  YELLOW ON  value  39    Set  FIRST SET   Short text  Space   Alarm text    ID  6   color  YELLOW ON MAGENTA  Value  50    Set  FIRST SET  Short text  Bravo   Alarm text    ID  7   color  YELLOW ON  Value  40          Creating Custom Screens             Micus Alarm and Control System    269    Creating Custom Screens    8 9 3 Selecting Enu
265. to maintain more than one event log  you will be prompted  to select the event log you want to archive                          Select Event Log File   Look in       ASCII          ch ES   zo om 20040108 Sonn Is E 2004_01_21  2004 01 03  20040109 20040116 Szonn zz  20040104 Som 1  20040117 Son nz  Sam mme  20040112 20040118  2004 01 24   20040106  2004 01 13  20040119  2004 nm ze  20040107  20040114 Son p 20  L     HH   gt   File name   2004_01_24  Files of type    v   Cancel                   The pull down list in the Select Event Log dialog box contains the names of all event  loggers in your system  Select the logger you are interested in and click the OK push  button  To exit the command without selecting the logger  click on the Cancel push but   ton     Once you select the event log  the Copy Event Log dialog box will pop up on the  screen  The dialog box layout is depicted in the following picture     Micus Alarm and Control System 91    Commands       Copy Event Log       List of files     Select Files      2000_04_02  2000_04_29  2000_04_30  2000_05_03  2000_05_04  2000_05_05  2000_05_07  2000_05_08  2000_05_09  2000_05_10  2000_05_11  2000 05 12                                        K  K K K K K K K  IK  IK  K  K              From date   25 Jan 2000 00 00 00  To date   25 Jan 2004 23 59 59    Copy Stop File copy in progress  NNN Exit    Destination directory        F    Microsoft Windows Network   E a MICUS    ICIUS     PUPIN    WRASTKO   S      RASTKOSRASTKO_D  S 
266. to the MACS event logger  which in turn  forwards these reports to all other recipients     To configure your service to send event reports to the event logger  highlight the  service name in the MACS IO Configuration utility main dialog box and click on the  Event Reporting push button     The Event Reporting dialog box will pop up on the screen  The dialog box has the    following layout                 Computer name   DOSITEJ  Protocol Port    4464          Event Reporting  MACS Recipients Selected Recipients  LOGGER DOSITEJ 4464  PAGER    Delete       Exit             MACS Recipients    Computer name    list contains all possible event reportrecipients known to the  selected service  You can select your event report recipient from  that list  or you can enter it manually in the Computer Name and  the Protocol Port fields  Typically  you will configure the service to  send its event reports to your event logger     edit box allows you to enter the destination computer name   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list  the  Computer Name field is filled in automatically     Micus Alarm and Control System 195    Configuration    Protocol Port edit box allows you to enter the destination TCP IP protocol port   When you select your recipient from the MACS Recipients list   the Protocol  Port field is filled in automatically     Selected Recipients list contains all already configured recipients  These are the des   tinations to which the service will send eve
267. tor Configuration  IPG Quality Control Configuration  Liebert RCM8 Configuration  MACS IO Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Confiauration                   Select MACS IO Configuration and click on the Open push button  or simply double   click on the MACS IO Configuration name  The main MACS IO Configuration dialog  box will pop up on the screen     MACS can be configured to use more than one MACS IO Windows XP service  For  example  if you have regional MACS servers  you will configure one MACS IO module  per each server  When you run the utility  the list box on the left hand side will show all  presently configured MACS IO modules  When you run the utility for the first time  the  list box will be empty  and you will have to add your first MACS IO module to the  system  Once your MACS IO is configured  the MACS  O Configuration utility will  allow you to view and to modify that configuration     The MACS IO Configuration utility main dialog box is depicted in the following picture     190 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration          MACS 10 Service Configuration  MACS 10  Add Service    Delete Service    Event Reporting    Configure Slots  View Service         Exit                     The push buttons and their functions are     Configure Service  Add Service  Delete Service    Event Reporting    Configure Slots  View Service    Exit    allows you to modify the configuration of an already configured  MACS IO service     allows you to add a new MACS 
268. trol System    Commands    LEDs for the unused points are left blank  For the configured points  active outputs are  shown as red  while inactive outputs are shown as green     The bottom section of the monitor window contains two panels  The left hand panel  shows the first 16 output points  while the right hand panel shows the remaining 16  outputs  Unused points are left blank  Configured points are displayed using colors  and names that you selected through the configuration process  As explained above   you can operate these points using the SET  RESET  PULSE and TOGGLE push  buttons  You can refresh the entire monitor window status using the REFRESH push  button     6 3 Equipment Locking    Equipment locking is primarily used to ensure that only one operator can operate a  selected piece of equipment at a given point in time  For example  if you need to repair  a radio transmitter controlled by MACS  you will turn the RF power off and lock the  transmitter  such that no one else can accidentally turn the RF power on while the  repair is taking place     Locking the equipment is also useful when you need to operate a remote piece of  equipment connected to MACS via a dial up line  If you don   t lock the equipment   MACS will dial out on each command that you send  get the response from the  equipment and hang up  This optimizes telephone line usage and keeps the long  distance bills down  but can be very time consuming if you need to send many  successive commands to th
269. trol System  MACS     Inputs  C    Outputs           11  12  13 O  14    15    16       SET RESET       Communication       K 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16    pt E HOLOIOI   JE  Ji E gx    H  CH    e    10 11 12 13 14 15 16       CI l   IOC eo H    OD  d OO P DM      a CX  10  11  E  12  J  EIS  14   15 CE    16  i    REFRESH          PULSE   TOGGLE             The operation of this monitor window is the same as the previously described one     Micus Alarm and Control System 75       Commands    6 2 4 3 Slot With 32 Outputs    This slot type has 32 REED relays and no inputs  For this slot type  the system will  display the following monitor window        D PCI 32REL           Micus Alarm and Control System  MACS  Communication        1234 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  Outputs  GGG CC CC CC CC CC CH  17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  Outputs  C E  E H CH O O O  3    E O C  O O O en    Outputs  Outputs     BR Waveauide to A 17  F Waveguide to B 18  CIR  _ Standby SSPA 20  AN  ES    Standby Mod  SCHEI   l 24     25  26      27  1    Bi  es     1  2  3  4  5  6  H  8       ER  15  __jLights Parking    16   iLights Lobby                  SET   RESET   PULSE   TOGGLE   REFRESH               The top section of the monitor window shows the MACS server front panel  and two  rows of LEDs that indicate status of all output points  Note that these LEDs are repre   sented in monitor windows only  They do not actually exist in the MACS server itself     76 Micus Alarm and Con
270. ty   EVEN v    Stop bits     aa    Character size     Dial out     Iw Dial out port    Modem initialization string     AT amp F amp N28408H18F 28D 2801 OOVIX4S0 157  Cancel                        150 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Name edit box allows you to type in the name of the serial port  Windows  NT standard names are COM1 to COM255  In some cases  you  may need to use a special naming convention for the serial ports  above COM10  such as     COM10  Consult your hardware ven   dor manual for details     Data rate pull down list allows you to select data rate    Parity pull down list allows you to select parity    Stop bits pull down list allows you to select the number of stop bits    Character size pull down list allows you to select the number of bits per charac   ter    Dial out port checkbox allows you to specify whether you will use the selected  serial port as a dial out port  For the pager  this check box is usu   ally checked     When you designate the selected port as a dial out port  the  Modem initialization string field is enabled  so that you can specify  the set of options to be used to initialize the modem     Modem initialization string    edit box allows you to enter a string of options to be used to initial   ize the modem before dialing out     To add a serial port to your pager configuration  click on the OK push button  To close  the dialog box without adding a serial port  click on the Cancel push button     7 4 5 2 Modify Seri
271. u  will use the Monitor Configuration dialog box  You will use the same dialog box to open  existing custom screens for editing  or to delete screens you no longer need  You can  open this dialog box from the File pull down menu  as shown in the picture below             MACS Display Editor Version 3 0 BAX    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help  New Ctrl N    Open    Ctrl o  Save Ctrl S       Exit       You can also open the Monitor Configuration dialog box by clicking on the Open  toolbar icon     Micus Alarm and Control System 233    Creating Custom Screens         gt  MACS Display Editor Version 3 0    File View Bitmaps EnumeratedSets Actions Help    Lebl dee           Sex     In either case  the Monitor Configuration dialog box will pop up on the screen  The    dialog box has the following layout                  Custom Screen Configuration  Screen name  Bitmap file   Analog Test Monitor  WDOSITEJ Dosite  D MACS Config Analog bmp  Building Layout   DOSITEJ Dositej D MACS  Config Building  bmp             File Copy Control  WDOSITEJ Dosite  D MACS  Config FileCopy  bmp   Gl Encoder  DOSITEJ Dosite  D MACS  Config Gl_Test bmp   Image Video Monitor  WDOSITEJ Dositej D MACS    Config Image_Video_Monitor bmp    IPG Test D  MACS Config IPGT est bmp    IV Summary Test D  MACS   Config I  _Summary bmp   Large Test Image  WDOSITEJ Dosite  D MACS  Config LargeT estB ackground bmp   Leitch AVS 481   DOSITEJ Dositej D MACS  Config Leitch bmp   Look Network Ontario D  MACS C
272. u must specify a folder that  differs from the event log maintained by the event logger     Binary Event Log checkbox allows you to select whether your module will maintain  its own binary event log  This box is normally unchecked  which  means that the module will not create and maintain its own set of  daily created event log binary files     Binary log path edit box allows you to specify the fully qualified path to the folder  which will contain the MACS IO module specific event log binary  files     For discussion on how to specify the path for the MACS IO module specific event log   please refer to the chapter on Event Logger Configuration     7 6 2 Modify Service    The Configure Service command allows you to change an existing MACS IO service  configuration  In the current MACS software release  configuration changes take effect  on the first subsequent Windows NT service startup  Therefore  after making changes  in your MACS IO configuration  make sure to restart the corresponding Windows NT  service     To change the configuration of an existing MACS IO service  highlight its name in the  list  and click the Configure Service push button in the MACS IO Configuration utility  main dialog box  The Modify Server Configuration dialog box has the same layout as  the New Server Configuration dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System 193    Configuration    7 6 3 Delete Service    To delete an existing MACS IO module configuration  highlight the name of the  module you 
273. ue above  the upper threshold  and which one to use for the value below the lower threshold  To  make your selection  you will use the Select Bitmaps command     Adding bitmap images to your custom screen is a two step process  First  you select  the current bitmaps  For digital points you select the current active state bitmap  and  the current inactive state bitmap  For the analog points you select the current bitmaps  for the values within limits  below lower threshold and above upper threshold  Next   you add a point to your custom screen and select the bitmap display style  The editor  will use the selected bitmaps to draw the point     To select current bitmaps  click on the Bitmaps   gt  Select Bitmaps in the main menu  or  on the Bitmaps icon          gt  MACS Display Editor Version 3 0 BAX    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help    G H Select SES i    Manage Bitmaps                      or           MACS Display Editor Version 3 0 BAX    Fie view Bitmaps Enumerated Sets Actions Help          The Select Current Bitmaps dialog box will pop up on the screen     Micus Alarm and Control System 259    Creating Custom Screens       Select Current Bitmaps       Active Above Bitmap    Open Fridge v    C  MACS  Contig OpenFridge  bmp    Inactive Within Bitmap    Big Amber Light  Big Green Light  Big Red Light  Closed Fridge       Pulsed Below Bitmap                   This dialog box allows you to select the current bitmaps for each point state  As you  select the bitm
274. uilding security and building environment   The equipment supported by the system ranges from telephone switches  satellite  transmitters  receivers  modulators  demodulators  waveguides  electrical power  monitoring  to environment and security sensors     The equipment operational status and controls are presented using user definable  graphical images  such as geographical maps  building layouts  equipment diagrams   and equipment front panels  In addition  all changes in the equipment status are  reported in textual form and saved in the event log files     Each individual status change reported by the equipment may be configured to send  pager  e mail or fax messages to a list of personnel responsible for that equipment     Each status change can also be configured to automatically create a trouble ticket  an  automatically created form that contains details on the equipment failure  Trouble  tickets allow operators to select the suggested course of action to repair the    Micus Alarm and Control System 5    Introduction    equipment  to assign a technician responsible for the repair  to enter notes on the  action taken and  once the repairs are done  to close the ticket     MACS is a multi user system  implemented as a distributed client server application   which runs either on a single computer or on a local or wide area TCP IP network   under the Windows XP  Windows 2000 and Windows NT operating systems  When  more than one MACS runs on the network  the systems can e
275. uipment  modules generate event reports  Typically  the equipment modules are configured to  send their event logs to the Event Logger   The Event Logger saves these event  reports into the event log and sends them to all active GUIs and to other components   such as the pager and trouble ticketing components  This scenario is depicted in the  following figure        1  In this software revision  the system can actually maintain the text event log  binary event log or both  At the  present time  the system provides tools to view and search only the text log  The binary log is for future use  for  features such as graphs  trend analysis  etc    2  In its minimal configuration  MACS consists of a single equipment module and only one GUI  In such case there  is no need for the Event Logger     116 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Ss    event reports A event reports    Event Log    event reports   N event reports    TCP IP Network   event reports          S      Client GUI Workstations       To enable the Event Logger to perform its functions  you need to configure the  following parameters     The name you want to use for the Event Logger service   The name of the computer on which the Event Logger runs  The TCP IP protocol port to use for the Event Logger service  The path to the event log files    Event reporting destinations    The following pages show how to configure these parameters     To configure your Event Logger  use the event logger configuration ut
276. ulsed Severity  Page   OK   Delete    Quit    Configuration    edit box allows you to enter the text to include in the event report  issued when the point is pulsed  If you leave this field blank  no  event report will be displayed in the MACS user interface  but the  system will still update all graphical status and control windows     pull down list allows you to select the foreground and background  color combination to use in the event report issued when the point  is pulsed     pull down list allows you to select the severity level to use in the  event report issued when the point is pulsed     checkbox allows you to specify whether to send a pager message  when the point is pulsed     push button makes the specified changes in the point configura   tion and closes the dialog box     push button is used to delete the point configuration from the  database     push button closes the dialog box without making any changes in  the point configuration     Micus Alarm and Control System 211    Configuration    7 7 Access To Configuration Utilities    As mentioned earlier in this document  you can customize access to MACS configu   ration utilities based on the way you want to manage your system configuration  Some  MACS users allow full access to all MACS programs from all workstations on their  network  Others restrict access to the configuration utilities only to those workstations  used by system administrators     Your first option is to install MACS configuration utilitie
277. undmax  i eet  Spider Solitaire  oe p D Startup iP LogCfg    ne f SS i  i IPGGUI Is Adobe Reader 6 0 bi MacsEditor    Internet Explorer i  MacsManalLocation  C  MACS Programs  MSN Explorer MacsMenu  Lei Notepad v P d  S  i Outlook Express wi MacsUtl  i IPGCfg s  Remote Assistance i  MapiCfg     Windows Media Player Wi MenuCfg  d WordPad wi PagerCfg     10Cfg  i Geet  m  Microsoft Developer Network  wW    EH Microsoft Visual C   6 0  Paint   T  Real  i MacsUtl H winzip    J   MSN Messenger 6 0  All Programs         RealOne Player    start  2   amp   8 23D 12 43PM    If your system is configured to provide access to the configuration utilities from the  MACS main GUI   you can also start the Display Editor by selecting configuration  utilities from the Configuration   gt  Select Utility pull down menu or by clicking the  Configuration button on the toolbar        1  How to add configuration utilities to the MACS main GUI is explained earlier in this document     Micus Alarm and Control System 229    Creating Custom Screens          D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX       Select Configuration Utility    The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities            Color Definitions  Demo Server Configuration  Display Editor   DSA 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration   File Copy Configuration   GI Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   I
278. uters and programs on your network   that will receive event reports from the pager being configured     allows you to create a text report that contains your pager present  configuration     exits the Pager Configuration utility     Micus Alarm and Control System 145    Configuration    7 4 1 Add Pager    When you run the Pager Configuration utility for the first time  the list of existing  pagers will be empty  and you will have to add a new pager to your system configu     ration     To add a new pager  click on the Add Server button in the Pager Configuration main  dialog box  and the Add Server dialog box will appear        Add Server             Server name       Computer name   Protocol port  0    Text Event Log    Text log path       Binary Event Log     Binary log path       Cancel  EE                   The Add Server dialog box has the following layout     Server name    Computer name    146    edit box allows you to specify the name of your pager  This name  will appear in all event reports originated by the pager     The name you select must be the same as the name you speci   fied while installing the pager Windows NT service  The pager  Windows NT service uses this name on startup to query its con   figuration from the database  If there is a mismatch in names  the  service will not find its configuration and will not start properly     edit box allows you to specify the name of the computer your  pager will run on  This name is used  in conjunction with the pro
279. ve     edit box allows you to enter the text to include in the event report  issued when the point becomes inactive  If you leave this field  blank  no event report will be displayed in the MACS user inter   face  but the system will still update all graphical status and con   trol windows     pull down list allows you to select the foreground and background  color combination to use in the event report issued when the  point becomes inactive     pull down list allows you to select the severity level to use in the  event report issued when the point becomes inactive     checkbox allows you to specify whether to send a pager mes   sage when the point becomes inactive     push button makes the changes in the point configuration and  closes the dialog box     Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    Delete push button is used to delete point configuration from the data   base   Quit push button closes the dialog box without making any changes in    the point configuration     7 6 8 2 Digital Output Point Definition    Digital output points are used to control the equipment or external relays attached to  the MACS server  These points have two states  active and inactive  In addition   output points can be pulsed  Each time it detects an output point state transition  the  MACS IO module reports it to the MACS server  To present point state transition to the  operators  MACS displays a text message in all active GUIs and updates all active  windows that contain that poi
280. w Insert Format Help    Dep SI A e  D    FATAL  14 Jan 2000 17 08 47 09  Greenwich Mean Time  Ga  Chassis 1  Slot 18  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C08    Message  910  Aborted HDLC frame      FAULT  14 Jan 2000 17 08 53 29  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 0  Slot 1  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C30  Message  776  HDLC message too large    FATAL  14 Jan 2000 17 09 10 08  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 1  Slot 1  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Oxo0001C08  Message  910  Aborted HDLC frame   FAULT  14 Jan 2000 17 09 15 05  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 1  Slot 0  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C28  Message  776  HDLC message too large    FATAL  14 Jan 2000 17 08 47 09  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 1  Slot 18  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C06  Message  910  Aborted HDLC frame   FATAL  14 Jan 2000 17 08 47 09  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 1  Slot 18  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C08  Message  910  Aborted HDLC frame   FAULT  14 Jan 2000 17 08 53 29  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis 0  Slot i  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C30  Message  776  HDLC message too large    FATAL  14 Jan 2000 17 09 10 08  Greenwich Mean Time    Chassis i  Slot    i  DSE board  Task name  Aux Data data  Ox00001C06       A              For Help  press F1    6 7 Viewing Options    The MACS user interface is a MS Windows application  similar in    look and feel    to  many other applications you are familiar with  As
281. want to delete  and click on the Delete Service push button in the MACS  IO Configuration utility main dialog box     The following dialog box will pop up        MACS IO Service Configuration       This service may be used For IO monitoring   Are you sure you want to delete it                       To delete the selected MACS IO module  click on the Yes push button  To exit dialog  box without deleting the module  click on the No push button     7 6 4 View Service    To view your MACS IO module configuration  select the interface name in the MACS  IO Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the View Service push button   The system will create a configuration report and present it using the WordPad text  editor  From within the editor  you can save the report into a text file  print it  search for  keywords  cut and paste report contents  and perform other functions typical of  WordPad  The following picture illustrates a typical report layout        10 Service Configuration   Notepad RAX  File Edit Format View Help       server name  macs IO  Server ID  85  Computer name  DOSITEJ  Protocol port  39000    Event reporting   DOSITEJ  4443  List of units     MACS IO             194 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    7 6 5 Event Reporting    During its operation  your MACS IO service will generate a number of event reports  informing you about changes in its input and output points status  Typically  the service  is configured to send its event reports 
282. we assume that configuration utilities are installed on  your workstation     7 1 1 Starting Colors Configuration Utility    You can start the ColorCfg configuration utility from your GUI  from the Windows Start  menu or from the Windows Explorer  To start it from the GUI  select Configuration   gt   Select Utility pull down menu  or click on the Configuration toolbar icon     D Micus Alarm And Control System Revision 3 3 1 BAX    File Monitor Equipment Locking Pager EventLog   View Archive Configuration    Ss alg El en dii    Select Configuration Utility             The Configuration Utilities dialog box will pop up  and present you with a list of all  configuration utilities accessible from your GUI        Configuration Utilities       Demo Server Configuration   Display Editor   DSR 4800 Configuration   Event Log Configuration   File Copy Configuration   Gl Encoder Configuration   Graphic Editor   Image Video Monitor Configuration   IPG Quality Control Configuration   Liebert RCM8 Configuration   MAPI Configuration   Monitor Configuration GC  MPEG Monitor Confiauration  yJ    Cancel      Select Color Definitions and click on the Open push button  or simply doubleclick on  the Color Definitions name  The main Color Definitions dialog box will pop up on the  screen                    108 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration    To start the Colors utility from the Windows Start menu  click on Start   gt  Programs   gt   MACS   gt  Colors  as shown in the following 
283. wever  for security reasons  the Windows NT Loca System account does  not have access to the network resources  Thus  if you specify a network path to your  event log folder  and you run the Event Logger under the Loca System account  the  Event Logger will not be able to create and write into the event log files     To examine your Event Logger Windows XP service setup  open the Administrative  Tools from the Control Panel  and then the Windows XP Service Manager located in  the Administrative Tools        By Services            Services  Local                 File Action View Help    a eae e    MACS Event Logger    Stop the service  Restart the service    Opens property sheet for the current selection      amp  amp  Services  Local     Name   Ry IPSEC Services   Ba IPv   Internet Conn     KZ Logical Disk Manager  KZ Logical Disk Manage     Sa MACS Demo Server  Mac Event Logger  MACS MAPI Service  Sa MACS Pager   KZ Messenger   Sa M5 Software Shado     KZ Net Logon   Sa NetMeeting Remote     Sa Network Connections    Sa Network DDE  Ba Makun AME Det     lt           Description   Manages I     Provides in     Detects an     Configures       Transmits      Manages s     Supports p     Enables an     Manages 0     Provides n       aax               Status    Started    Started    Startet    Started    Started      Extended A Standard                  AA                         Stop    Restart   All Tasks  gt   Refresh  Properties    Help          Highlight the MACS Event Logge
284. which  change color depending on the point state  This style is  typically used to depict communication links or electrical  circuits     Points can be presented as open or closed doors in an  architectural drawing  depicting a building layout  This  style is typically used for security applications     Point states can be presented using two bitmap draw   ings  one for each state  In this example  the active point  state is mapped into a drawing of an open fridge  while  the inactive point state is mapped into a drawing of a  closed fridge     Analog points can also be displayed as gauges  with the  handle optionally changing color when exceeding the  upper or lower threshold     Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    Analog points can be displayed as vertical or horizontal  histograms that optionally change color when their  respective analog values exceed the upper or lower  threshold     Vertical Bar          Horizontal Bar    The numerical reading from analog points can be dis   played using an integer  decimal or scientific notation     The numerical values for the output points can be set  from an edit box     Some analog points can have a fixed set of values that  can be mapped into a list of names  For example  TV  channel numbers can be mapped into the corresponding  TV channel names  In such case  instead of displaying  numerical values  the screens will contain the associated  names  Each name can be displayed in a different color     Some analog output poi
285. will correspond to one service provider   Once you add all service providers you intend to use  you will add a list of your  personnel that you want to page using each service  Finally  you will also define for  each individual which pager messages they should receive     You will manage your pager services using the Pager Service Selection dialog box   This dialog box allows you to add  modify  view or delete your pager services  It also  allows you to manage your message recipients     To enter the Pager Service Selection dialog box  highlight your pager name in the  Pager Configuration utility main dialog box  and click on the Pager Services push  button  The dialog box has the following layout     154 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration       Pager Service Selection    Modify Service    Add Service  Delete Service    Pager Users    View Services               Exit                  The push buttons and their functions are     Modify Service  Add Service  Delete Service    Pager Users    View Services    allows you to modify an existing service configuration   allows you to add a new service to your pager configuration     allows you to delete an existing service from your pager configu   ration     allows you to define your list of pager users  and a list of mes   sages each user will receive     allows you to create a report containing a list of all your pager ser   vices     Micus Alarm and Control System 155    Configuration    7 4 7 1 Add Pager Service    T
286. xchange peer to peer  information  or they can be organized in a hierarchical tree structure  in which a  central MACS server controls regional MACS servers     The system is highly modular  thus allowing for rapid and easy customization   according to the specific application requirements     3 2 Why MACS     Most equipment vendors offer some software to control their equipment  In some  cases  the software might be quite costly  In other cases the software is shipped with  the equipment for free  So  why choose MACS     Here are some of the key reasons to use MACS     System Integration In most cases  end users have equipment from more than one  vendor  If the equipment specific software is used for each kind of  equipment  the operators must deal with a number of programs   with different user interfaces  functions  installation procedures   and so on  All of this imposes an additional burden on installation   configuration  training and day to day use  MACS provides a uni   form and consistent user interface  a standard set of features for  all equipment  and a common installation procedure and configu   ration process     Multi user access Most equipment specific software programs are built as mono   lithic  single user programs  MACS is a multi user system that  allows a number of operators to work concurrently and indepen   dently on the equipment     Networking MACS is a distributed client server application that may run on a  single computer  on a local area network 
287. xt will be included in  the e mail and fax messages and sent to all users configured to  receive this message     7 5 6 3 Delete User    To delete an existing user from your MAPI configuration  highlight the user name in  the MAPI Users dialog box  and click on the Delete push button  The following dialog  box will pop up        MAPI Users       A Are you sure you want to delete this user              To delete the user  click on the Yes push button  To exit without deleting the user   click on the No push button     7 5 7 MAPI Account    To use the native Windows MAPI services  you have to create one or more MAPI  profiles  Instructions on how to create MAPI profiles  please refer to the Windows  documentation  Each MAPI profile contains an account name and a password  Before  sending any MAPI messages  you have to login to MAPI using this account name and  password  Similarly  your MACS MAPI interface must login into the Windows MAPI to  submit its messages     To enable your MAPI interface to submit messages to the native Windows MAPI  services  you have to specify which account name and password to use  To do so   select the MAPI interface name in the MAPI Configuration utility main dialog box and  click on the MAPI Account push button     The MAPI Account dialog box has the following layout     186 Micus Alarm and Control System    Configuration       MAPI Account       Account   Michael  Password   psswd123  Subject   Micus Alarm and Control System Event Report    Cance
288. y creates and maintains log files on a daily basis  Since all event  reports are stored into files  the simplest way of analyzing events is to view log files   While viewing a log file  you can search for specific keywords or text strings  such as  time stamps or equipment names  In addition  you can selectively print relevant  sections of the file  or the entire file     Typically  MACS maintains only a single event log  managed by the Event Logger   The event logger is an equipment module specifically designed to handle the event  log  Other equipment modules send their event reports to that event logger  However   the system does allow for more than one logger  in which case you have to select  which logger files you want to examine     In addition to the centralized event log  which contains the event reports from the  entire system  each equipment module can be configured to maintain its own event  log  Such a log will contain only the event reports from the equipment attached to that  equipment module     80 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    The system can maintain the ASCII event log  binary event log  or both  ASCII logs  contain less information  but may be viewed and analyzed using any text editor  Binary  logs contain more information and are better suited for the more complex processes  such as trend analysis  event correlation  and root cause rationalization  The View  Event Log command provides access to the ASCII log files     6 5 1 View Event Log  
289. yle and a solid graph style     You can define the length and width of the graph in pix   els  One vertical line is added to the graph each time a  new value is received  Thus  the scrolling speed of the  graph depends on its width in pixels  and the polling  interval used to sample the value        Micus Alarm and Control System 245    Creating Custom Screens    8 7 4 Analog Input Point Styles    When you select an analog point  the Display Editor will present a choice of display  styles depicted in the following picture     Display Styles    Read Only   Scientific     JTEMERATURE     _JTEMERATI    TEMERATUF  L_JTEMERATURE               d    Styles available to draw analog inputs are     e Solid rectangle proportional to the point name length   e Transparent rectangle proportional to the point name length  e Solid custom size rectangle   e Transparent custom size rectangle   e Solid half width rectangle   e Transparent half width rectangle   e Solid full width rectangle   e Transparent full width rectangle    e Right justified integer value    246 Micus Alarm and Control System    Left justified integer value  Right justified decimal value  Left justified decimal value  Right justified    E    notation value  Left justified  E notation value  Round LED   Square LED   Horizontal histogram   Vertical histogram   Gauge   Bitmap   Solid scrolling graph  Transparent scrolling graph    Enumerated integer value    Micus Alarm and Control System    Creating Custom Screens    247    
290. you need to enter only the SNMP command and  the object IDs you want to retrieve  To retrieve the status of an SNMP device  use    GET  GETNEXT and WALK commands  For example   WALK system    command will retrieve all objects under the system arch in the selected agent Manage   ment Information Base  MIB   This is depicted in the following picture        E KZ  MACS SNMP Manager PLATO Command Line Mode            walk system   OID  system sysDescr 0   VAL  SCO TCP IP Runtime Release 2 0 0   OID  system sysObjectID 0   VAL   iso org dod  internet  private  enterprises  32 1 2 0 0  OID  system sysUpTime 0   VAL  24347   OID  system sysContact 0   VAL     OID  system sysName 0  VAL  plato micus com  OID  system sysLocation O  VAL   OID  system sysServices 0       L  4  END OF MIB SUBTREE    walk system  Send       Exit                      When you send your command to the unit  the command is displayed in the large   scrollable working area of the dialog box  When the system gets the response from  the unit  it will display the response below your command  The unit response may  contain one or more lines        3  For details on the SNMP support  please refer to the MACS SNMP supplement documentation     64 Micus Alarm and Control System    Commands    As you continue your dialogue with the unit  the working area of the window will start to  scroll  You can use the scroll bar on the right side of the window to scroll through the  sequence of your commands and responses     Note 
291. zem             16 Micus Alarm and Control System    Overview    4 2 Status And Control Points    MACS defines any equipment in terms of units  slots and points  Points represent  equipment parameters which can be controlled  or parameters that can be read to  determine equipment status  The MACS supports several point types  digital inputs   digital outputs  analog inputs  analog outputs and summary points  Typically  MACS  status points represent equipment status and alarms  environmental alarms  security  alarms  power system status and alarms  communications alarms  and other alarms   MACS control points are used to control the environment  For example  they can  switch heating and cooling on and off or they can tune equipment parameters such as  frequency and gain and change equipment parameters  For example they can switch  TV channels     MACS equipment modules support digital inputs  digital outputs  analog inputs and  analog outputs  These inputs and outputs can be either on the plug in boards installed  into the computer itself  or in the external equipment attached to the computer via the  serial lines or through the network connections  Plug in boards or the external  equipment monitor contact closures  TTL levels  and other hardware signals  In  addition  servers use either ASCII or binary communication protocols to interrogate  and control more complex external equipment     Digital inputs have two states  active and inactive  Digital outputs can be active   ina
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Evoluent BNEEMP mouse pad  C - Entry User Manual  YSI Pro 2030 User Manual  User Manual - Maxon Australia  BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG  Advantech FPM-8151H User Manual  CFW11T  SYBA SD-PCI15025  PAPI Documentation  Elite Screens M120UWV1 projection screen    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file